1 /* SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-only */
2 /*
3  * mac80211 <-> driver interface
4  *
5  * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
6  * Copyright 2006-2007	Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
7  * Copyright 2007-2010	Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
8  * Copyright 2013-2014  Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
9  * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH
10  * Copyright (C) 2018 - 2022 Intel Corporation
11  */
12 
13 #ifndef MAC80211_H
14 #define MAC80211_H
15 
16 #include <linux/bug.h>
17 #include <linux/kernel.h>
18 #include <linux/if_ether.h>
19 #include <linux/skbuff.h>
20 #include <linux/ieee80211.h>
21 #include <linux/lockdep.h>
22 #include <net/cfg80211.h>
23 #include <net/codel.h>
24 #include <net/ieee80211_radiotap.h>
25 #include <asm/unaligned.h>
26 
27 /**
28  * DOC: Introduction
29  *
30  * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
31  * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
32  * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
33  * drivers.
34  */
35 
36 /**
37  * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
38  *
39  * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
40  * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
41  * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
42  * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
43  * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
44  * tasklet function.
45  *
46  * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
47  *	 use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
48  */
49 
50 /**
51  * DOC: Warning
52  *
53  * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
54  * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
55  */
56 
57 /**
58  * DOC: Frame format
59  *
60  * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
61  * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
62  * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
63  * hardware.
64  *
65  * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
66  *
67  * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
68  * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
69  *
70  * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
71  * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
72  */
73 
74 /**
75  * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
76  *
77  * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
78  * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
79  * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
80  * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
81  *
82  * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
83  * suspend.
84  *
85  * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
86  *
87  */
88 
89 /**
90  * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
91  *
92  * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed
93  * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness
94  * between different stations/interfaces.
95  * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead
96  * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx().
97  * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx().
98  *
99  * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue
100  * driver operation.
101  *
102  * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with
103  * another per-sta for non-data/non-mgmt and bufferable management frames, and
104  * a single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
105  *
106  * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
107  * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
108  *
109  * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame from a
110  * txq, it calls ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a
111  * queue, it calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op.
112  *
113  * Drivers can optionally delegate responsibility for scheduling queues to
114  * mac80211, to take advantage of airtime fairness accounting. In this case, to
115  * obtain the next queue to pull frames from, the driver calls
116  * ieee80211_next_txq(). The driver is then expected to return the txq using
117  * ieee80211_return_txq().
118  *
119  * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
120  * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
121  * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
122  * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
123  * .release_buffered_frames().
124  * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
125  * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
126  * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
127  */
128 
129 /**
130  * DOC: HW timestamping
131  *
132  * Timing Measurement and Fine Timing Measurement require accurate timestamps
133  * of the action frames TX/RX and their respective acks.
134  *
135  * To report hardware timestamps for Timing Measurement or Fine Timing
136  * Measurement frame RX, the low level driver should set the SKB's hwtstamp
137  * field to the frame RX timestamp and report the ack TX timestamp in the
138  * ieee80211_rx_status struct.
139  *
140  * Similarly, To report hardware timestamps for Timing Measurement or Fine
141  * Timing Measurement frame TX, the driver should set the SKB's hwtstamp field
142  * to the frame TX timestamp and report the ack RX timestamp in the
143  * ieee80211_tx_status struct.
144  */
145 struct device;
146 
147 /**
148  * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
149  *
150  * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
151  * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
152  */
153 enum ieee80211_max_queues {
154 	IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES =		16,
155 	IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP =	BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
156 };
157 
158 #define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE	0xff
159 
160 /**
161  * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
162  * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
163  * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
164  * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
165  * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
166  */
167 enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
168 	IEEE80211_AC_VO		= 0,
169 	IEEE80211_AC_VI		= 1,
170 	IEEE80211_AC_BE		= 2,
171 	IEEE80211_AC_BK		= 3,
172 };
173 
174 /**
175  * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
176  *
177  * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
178  * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
179  *
180  * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
181  * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
182  *	2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
183  * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
184  * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
185  * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
186  * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
187  * @mu_edca: is the MU EDCA configured
188  * @mu_edca_param_rec: MU EDCA Parameter Record for HE
189  */
190 struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
191 	u16 txop;
192 	u16 cw_min;
193 	u16 cw_max;
194 	u8 aifs;
195 	bool acm;
196 	bool uapsd;
197 	bool mu_edca;
198 	struct ieee80211_he_mu_edca_param_ac_rec mu_edca_param_rec;
199 };
200 
201 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
202 	unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
203 	unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
204 	unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
205 	unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
206 };
207 
208 /**
209  * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
210  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
211  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
212  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
213  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
214  *	this is used only with channel switching with CSA
215  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
216  */
217 enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
218 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH		= BIT(0),
219 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS	= BIT(1),
220 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR		= BIT(2),
221 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL	= BIT(3),
222 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH	= BIT(4),
223 };
224 
225 /**
226  * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
227  *
228  * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
229  * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
230  *
231  * @def: the channel definition
232  * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
233  * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
234  *	active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
235  * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
236  *	after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
237  *	this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
238  * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
239  * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
240  *	sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
241  */
242 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
243 	struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
244 	struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
245 
246 	u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
247 
248 	bool radar_enabled;
249 
250 	u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
251 };
252 
253 /**
254  * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
255  * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
256  *	exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
257  *	needs to be switched from one to the other.
258  * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
259  *      to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
260  *      will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
261  *      from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
262  *      implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
263  *      hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
264  *      will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
265  *      for changes/removal.)
266  */
267 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
268 	CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
269 	CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
270 };
271 
272 /**
273  * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
274  *
275  * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
276  * needs to switch from one chanctx to another.  The
277  * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
278  * done.
279  *
280  * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
281  * @link_conf: the link conf that's switching
282  * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
283  * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
284  */
285 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
286 	struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
287 	struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf;
288 	struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
289 	struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
290 };
291 
292 /**
293  * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
294  *
295  * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed(), link_info_changed()
296  * and vif_cfg_changed() callbacks to indicate which parameter(s) changed.
297  *
298  * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
299  *	also implies a change in the AID.
300  * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
301  * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
302  * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
303  * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
304  * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
305  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
306  * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
307  *	reason (IBSS and managed mode)
308  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
309  *	new beacon (beaconing modes)
310  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
311  *	enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
312  * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
313  * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
314  * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
315  * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
316  *	that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
317  * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
318  * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
319  * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
320  * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
321  * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
322  * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
323  *	changed
324  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
325  *	currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
326  * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
327  *	note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
328  *	context had been assigned.
329  * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
330  * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed
331  * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected
332  *	keep alive) changed.
333  * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface
334  * @BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER: fine timing measurement request responder
335  *	functionality changed for this BSS (AP mode).
336  * @BSS_CHANGED_TWT: TWT status changed
337  * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD: OBSS Packet Detection status changed.
338  * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR: BSS Color has changed
339  * @BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY: FILS discovery status changed.
340  * @BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP: Unsolicited broadcast probe response
341  *	status changed.
342  *
343  */
344 enum ieee80211_bss_change {
345 	BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC		= 1<<0,
346 	BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT	= 1<<1,
347 	BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE	= 1<<2,
348 	BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT		= 1<<3,
349 	BSS_CHANGED_HT			= 1<<4,
350 	BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES		= 1<<5,
351 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT		= 1<<6,
352 	BSS_CHANGED_BSSID		= 1<<7,
353 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON		= 1<<8,
354 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED	= 1<<9,
355 	BSS_CHANGED_CQM			= 1<<10,
356 	BSS_CHANGED_IBSS		= 1<<11,
357 	BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER		= 1<<12,
358 	BSS_CHANGED_QOS			= 1<<13,
359 	BSS_CHANGED_IDLE		= 1<<14,
360 	BSS_CHANGED_SSID		= 1<<15,
361 	BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP	= 1<<16,
362 	BSS_CHANGED_PS			= 1<<17,
363 	BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER		= 1<<18,
364 	BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS		= 1<<19,
365 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO		= 1<<20,
366 	BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH		= 1<<21,
367 	BSS_CHANGED_OCB                 = 1<<22,
368 	BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS		= 1<<23,
369 	BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE		= 1<<24,
370 	BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE		= 1<<25,
371 	BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER	= 1<<26,
372 	BSS_CHANGED_TWT			= 1<<27,
373 	BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD		= 1<<28,
374 	BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR	= 1<<29,
375 	BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY      = 1<<30,
376 	BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP = 1<<31,
377 
378 	/* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
379 };
380 
381 /*
382  * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
383  * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
384  * filtering will be disabled.
385  */
386 #define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
387 
388 /**
389  * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
390  * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
391  * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
392  * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
393  * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
394  *	they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
395  *	once each time the timeout triggers.
396  */
397 enum ieee80211_event_type {
398 	RSSI_EVENT,
399 	MLME_EVENT,
400 	BAR_RX_EVENT,
401 	BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT,
402 };
403 
404 /**
405  * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
406  * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
407  * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
408  */
409 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
410 	RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
411 	RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
412 };
413 
414 /**
415  * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
416  * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
417  */
418 struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
419 	enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
420 };
421 
422 /**
423  * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
424  * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
425  * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
426  * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
427  * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
428  */
429 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
430 	AUTH_EVENT,
431 	ASSOC_EVENT,
432 	DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
433 	DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
434 };
435 
436 /**
437  * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
438  * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
439  * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
440  * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
441  */
442 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
443 	MLME_SUCCESS,
444 	MLME_DENIED,
445 	MLME_TIMEOUT,
446 };
447 
448 /**
449  * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
450  * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
451  * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
452  * @reason: the reason code if applicable
453  */
454 struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
455 	enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
456 	enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
457 	u16 reason;
458 };
459 
460 /**
461  * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
462  * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
463  * @tid: the tid
464  * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
465  */
466 struct ieee80211_ba_event {
467 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
468 	u16 tid;
469 	u16 ssn;
470 };
471 
472 /**
473  * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
474  * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
475  * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
476  * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
477  * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
478  * @u:union holding the fields above
479  */
480 struct ieee80211_event {
481 	enum ieee80211_event_type type;
482 	union {
483 		struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
484 		struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
485 		struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
486 	} u;
487 };
488 
489 /**
490  * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data
491  *
492  * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO
493  *
494  * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
495  * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
496  */
497 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data {
498 	u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN];
499 	u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN];
500 };
501 
502 /**
503  * struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params - FTM responder parameters
504  *
505  * @lci: LCI subelement content
506  * @civicloc: CIVIC location subelement content
507  * @lci_len: LCI data length
508  * @civicloc_len: Civic data length
509  */
510 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params {
511 	const u8 *lci;
512 	const u8 *civicloc;
513 	size_t lci_len;
514 	size_t civicloc_len;
515 };
516 
517 /**
518  * struct ieee80211_fils_discovery - FILS discovery parameters from
519  * IEEE Std 802.11ai-2016, Annex C.3 MIB detail.
520  *
521  * @min_interval: Minimum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000)
522  * @max_interval: Maximum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000)
523  */
524 struct ieee80211_fils_discovery {
525 	u32 min_interval;
526 	u32 max_interval;
527 };
528 
529 /**
530  * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
531  *
532  * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
533  * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
534  *
535  * @addr: (link) address used locally
536  * @link_id: link ID, or 0 for non-MLO
537  * @htc_trig_based_pkt_ext: default PE in 4us units, if BSS supports HE
538  * @uora_exists: is the UORA element advertised by AP
539  * @ack_enabled: indicates support to receive a multi-TID that solicits either
540  *	ACK, BACK or both
541  * @uora_ocw_range: UORA element's OCW Range field
542  * @frame_time_rts_th: HE duration RTS threshold, in units of 32us
543  * @he_support: does this BSS support HE
544  * @twt_requester: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
545  *	mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
546  * @twt_responder: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
547  *	mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
548  * @twt_protected: does this BSS support protected TWT frames
549  * @twt_broadcast: does this BSS support broadcast TWT
550  * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
551  * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble
552  * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP)
553  * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
554  *	valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
555  *	with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
556  * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
557  *	as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
558  *	HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
559  *	only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
560  *	association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
561  *	%BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
562  * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
563  *	the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
564  *	(see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
565  * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
566  *	is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
567  *	IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
568  *	by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
569  *	guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
570  *	Note also that this is not used with MLD associations, mac80211 doesn't
571  *	know how to track beacons for all of the links for this.
572  * @beacon_int: beacon interval
573  * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
574  * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
575  *	index into the rate table configured by the driver in
576  *	the current band.
577  * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
578  * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
579  * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
580  * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
581  * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
582  *	configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
583  * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data
584  * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
585  *	This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel.
586  *	Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must
587  *	be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT.
588  * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
589  *	implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should
590  *	cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in
591  *	relation to the newly configured threshold.
592  * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value
593  *	implies disabled.  This is an alternative mechanism to the single
594  *	threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it.
595  * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold.
596  * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
597  * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
598  * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
599  * @txpower: TX power in dBm.  INT_MIN means not configured.
600  * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
601  *	Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
602  *	TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
603  *	NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
604  *	userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
605  *	NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
606  * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
607  * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed
608  *	to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS
609  *	if it has associated clients without P2P PS support.
610  * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from
611  *	transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated.
612  *	In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include
613  *	a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element.
614  * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN
615  *	protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the
616  *	station.
617  * @ftm_responder: whether to enable or disable fine timing measurement FTM
618  *	responder functionality.
619  * @ftmr_params: configurable lci/civic parameter when enabling FTM responder.
620  * @nontransmitted: this BSS is a nontransmitted BSS profile
621  * @transmitter_bssid: the address of transmitter AP
622  * @bssid_index: index inside the multiple BSSID set
623  * @bssid_indicator: 2^bssid_indicator is the maximum number of APs in set
624  * @ema_ap: AP supports enhancements of discovery and advertisement of
625  *	nontransmitted BSSIDs
626  * @profile_periodicity: the least number of beacon frames need to be received
627  *	in order to discover all the nontransmitted BSSIDs in the set.
628  * @he_oper: HE operation information of the BSS (AP/Mesh) or of the AP we are
629  *	connected to (STA)
630  * @he_obss_pd: OBSS Packet Detection parameters.
631  * @he_bss_color: BSS coloring settings, if BSS supports HE
632  * @fils_discovery: FILS discovery configuration
633  * @unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval: Unsolicited broadcast probe response
634  *	interval.
635  * @beacon_tx_rate: The configured beacon transmit rate that needs to be passed
636  *	to driver when rate control is offloaded to firmware.
637  * @power_type: power type of BSS for 6 GHz
638  * @tx_pwr_env: transmit power envelope array of BSS.
639  * @tx_pwr_env_num: number of @tx_pwr_env.
640  * @pwr_reduction: power constraint of BSS.
641  * @eht_support: does this BSS support EHT
642  * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
643  *	write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
644  *	for read access.
645  * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability
646  * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
647  *	when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
648  *	path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
649  *	be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
650  *	processed after it switches back to %NULL.
651  * @color_change_active: marks whether a color change is ongoing. Internally it is
652  *	write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
653  *	for read access.
654  * @color_change_color: the bss color that will be used after the change.
655  */
656 struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
657 	const u8 *bssid;
658 	unsigned int link_id;
659 	u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
660 	u8 htc_trig_based_pkt_ext;
661 	bool uora_exists;
662 	u8 uora_ocw_range;
663 	u16 frame_time_rts_th;
664 	bool he_support;
665 	bool twt_requester;
666 	bool twt_responder;
667 	bool twt_protected;
668 	bool twt_broadcast;
669 	/* erp related data */
670 	bool use_cts_prot;
671 	bool use_short_preamble;
672 	bool use_short_slot;
673 	bool enable_beacon;
674 	u8 dtim_period;
675 	u16 beacon_int;
676 	u16 assoc_capability;
677 	u64 sync_tsf;
678 	u32 sync_device_ts;
679 	u8 sync_dtim_count;
680 	u32 basic_rates;
681 	struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
682 	int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
683 	u16 ht_operation_mode;
684 	s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
685 	u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
686 	s32 cqm_rssi_low;
687 	s32 cqm_rssi_high;
688 	struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
689 	struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group;
690 	bool qos;
691 	bool hidden_ssid;
692 	int txpower;
693 	enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
694 	struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
695 	bool allow_p2p_go_ps;
696 	u16 max_idle_period;
697 	bool protected_keep_alive;
698 	bool ftm_responder;
699 	struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params *ftmr_params;
700 	/* Multiple BSSID data */
701 	bool nontransmitted;
702 	u8 transmitter_bssid[ETH_ALEN];
703 	u8 bssid_index;
704 	u8 bssid_indicator;
705 	bool ema_ap;
706 	u8 profile_periodicity;
707 	struct {
708 		u32 params;
709 		u16 nss_set;
710 	} he_oper;
711 	struct ieee80211_he_obss_pd he_obss_pd;
712 	struct cfg80211_he_bss_color he_bss_color;
713 	struct ieee80211_fils_discovery fils_discovery;
714 	u32 unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval;
715 	struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask beacon_tx_rate;
716 	enum ieee80211_ap_reg_power power_type;
717 	struct ieee80211_tx_pwr_env tx_pwr_env[IEEE80211_TPE_MAX_IE_COUNT];
718 	u8 tx_pwr_env_num;
719 	u8 pwr_reduction;
720 	bool eht_support;
721 
722 	bool csa_active;
723 	bool mu_mimo_owner;
724 	struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
725 
726 	bool color_change_active;
727 	u8 color_change_color;
728 };
729 
730 /**
731  * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
732  *
733  * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
734  *
735  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
736  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
737  *	number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
738  *	number and increasing the sequence number only when the
739  *	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
740  *	assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
741  *	for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
742  *	that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
743  *	If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
744  *	assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
745  *	802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
746  *	beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
747  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
748  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
749  *	station
750  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
751  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
752  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
753  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
754  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
755  *	because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
756  *	avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
757  *	firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
758  *	went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
759  *	the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
760  *	that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
761  *	since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
762  *	hardware queue.
763  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
764  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
765  * 	is for the whole aggregation.
766  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
767  * 	so consider using block ack request (BAR).
768  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
769  *	set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
770  *	be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
771  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
772  *	that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
773  *	off-channel operation.
774  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP: This frame uses hardware encapsulation
775  *	(header conversion)
776  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
777  *	used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
778  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
779  *	used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
780  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
781  *	frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
782  *	be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
783  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
784  *	transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
785  *	by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
786  *	queue gets full.
787  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
788  *	after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
789  *	be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
790  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
791  *	code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
792  *	should kick the MLME state machine.
793  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
794  *	MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
795  *	status to user space)
796  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
797  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
798  *	frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
799  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
800  *	the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
801  *	in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
802  *	handled properly by the device.
803  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
804  *	testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
805  *	TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
806  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
807  *	This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
808  *	frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
809  * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
810  *	when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
811  *	an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
812  *	the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
813  *	PS-Poll responses.
814  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
815  *	This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
816  *	the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
817  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
818  *	would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
819  *	monitor injection).
820  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
821  *	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
822  *	any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
823  *	This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
824  *	behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
825  *
826  * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
827  *	 forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
828  */
829 enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
830 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS		= BIT(0),
831 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ		= BIT(1),
832 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK			= BIT(2),
833 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT		= BIT(3),
834 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT		= BIT(4),
835 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM	= BIT(5),
836 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU			= BIT(6),
837 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED		= BIT(7),
838 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED		= BIT(8),
839 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK			= BIT(9),
840 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU			= BIT(10),
841 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK		= BIT(11),
842 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE	= BIT(12),
843 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK	= BIT(13),
844 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP		= BIT(14),
845 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED		= BIT(15),
846 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT		= BIT(16),
847 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER		= BIT(17),
848 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES		= BIT(18),
849 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION	= BIT(19),
850 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX		= BIT(20),
851 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX	= BIT(21),
852 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC			= BIT(22),
853 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC			= BIT(23) | BIT(24),
854 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN		= BIT(25),
855 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE	= BIT(26),
856 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE		= BIT(27),
857 	IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP		= BIT(28),
858 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE		= BIT(29),
859 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG		= BIT(30),
860 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED	= BIT(31),
861 };
862 
863 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT		23
864 
865 #define IEEE80211_TX_RC_S1G_MCS IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS
866 
867 /**
868  * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
869  *
870  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
871  *	protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
872  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
873  *	frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
874  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information
875  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame
876  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path
877  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP: This frame skips mesh path lookup
878  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
879  *	used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
880  *	it can be sent out.
881  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO: Do not overwrite the sequence number that
882  *	has already been assigned to this frame.
883  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_REORDER: This frame should not be reordered
884  *	relative to other frames that have this flag set, independent
885  *	of their QoS TID or other priority field values.
886  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MCAST_MLO_FIRST_TX: first MLO TX, used mostly internally
887  *	for sequence number assignment
888  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK: If not @IEEE80211_LINK_UNSPECIFIED, this
889  *	frame should be transmitted on the specific link. This really is
890  *	only relevant for frames that do not have data present, and is
891  *	also not used for 802.3 format frames. Note that even if the frame
892  *	is on a specific link, address translation might still apply if
893  *	it's intended for an MLD.
894  *
895  * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
896  */
897 enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
898 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO	= BIT(0),
899 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE		= BIT(1),
900 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT		= BIT(2),
901 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU			= BIT(3),
902 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT		= BIT(4),
903 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP	= BIT(5),
904 	IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING	= BIT(6),
905 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO		= BIT(7),
906 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_REORDER		= BIT(8),
907 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MCAST_MLO_FIRST_TX	= BIT(9),
908 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK		= 0xf0000000,
909 };
910 
911 #define IEEE80211_LINK_UNSPECIFIED	0xf
912 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK_UNSPEC	\
913 	u32_encode_bits(IEEE80211_LINK_UNSPECIFIED, \
914 			IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK)
915 
916 /**
917  * enum mac80211_tx_status_flags - flags to describe transmit status
918  *
919  * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_ACK_SIGNAL_VALID: ACK signal is valid
920  *
921  * These flags are used in tx_info->status.flags.
922  */
923 enum mac80211_tx_status_flags {
924 	IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_ACK_SIGNAL_VALID = BIT(0),
925 };
926 
927 /*
928  * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
929  * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
930  */
931 #define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK |		      \
932 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT |    \
933 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU |	      \
934 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED |	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK |		      \
935 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK |	      \
936 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER |    \
937 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC |		      \
938 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
939 
940 /**
941  * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
942  *	Rate Control algorithm.
943  *
944  * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
945  * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
946  *
947  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
948  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
949  *	This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
950  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
951  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
952  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
953  *	into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
954  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
955  *	Greenfield mode.
956  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
957  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
958  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
959  *	(80+80 isn't supported yet)
960  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
961  *	adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
962  *	NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
963  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
964  */
965 enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
966 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS		= BIT(0),
967 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT		= BIT(1),
968 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE	= BIT(2),
969 
970 	/* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
971 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS			= BIT(3),
972 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD		= BIT(4),
973 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH		= BIT(5),
974 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA		= BIT(6),
975 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI		= BIT(7),
976 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS			= BIT(8),
977 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH		= BIT(9),
978 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH		= BIT(10),
979 };
980 
981 
982 /* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
983 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
984 
985 /* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
986 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
987 
988 /* maximum number of rate stages */
989 #define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES	4
990 
991 /* maximum number of rate table entries */
992 #define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE	4
993 
994 /**
995  * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
996  *
997  * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
998  * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
999  * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
1000  *
1001  * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
1002  * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
1003  *
1004  * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
1005  * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
1006  *
1007  * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
1008  * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
1009  * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
1010  * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
1011  * information::
1012  *
1013  *    { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
1014  *
1015  * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
1016  * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
1017  * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
1018  * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
1019  * information should then contain::
1020  *
1021  *   { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
1022  *
1023  * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
1024  * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
1025  */
1026 struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
1027 	s8 idx;
1028 	u16 count:5,
1029 	    flags:11;
1030 } __packed;
1031 
1032 #define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY		31
1033 
ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate * rate,u8 mcs,u8 nss)1034 static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
1035 					  u8 mcs, u8 nss)
1036 {
1037 	WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
1038 	WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
1039 	rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
1040 }
1041 
1042 static inline u8
ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate * rate)1043 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
1044 {
1045 	return rate->idx & 0xF;
1046 }
1047 
1048 static inline u8
ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate * rate)1049 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
1050 {
1051 	return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
1052 }
1053 
1054 /**
1055  * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
1056  *
1057  * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
1058  *  (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
1059  *  (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
1060  *  (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
1061  *
1062  * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
1063  * @band: the band to transmit on (use e.g. for checking for races),
1064  *	not valid if the interface is an MLD since we won't know which
1065  *	link the frame will be transmitted on
1066  * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
1067  * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
1068  * @tx_time_est: TX time estimate in units of 4us, used internally
1069  * @control: union part for control data
1070  * @control.rates: TX rates array to try
1071  * @control.rts_cts_rate_idx: rate for RTS or CTS
1072  * @control.use_rts: use RTS
1073  * @control.use_cts_prot: use RTS/CTS
1074  * @control.short_preamble: use short preamble (CCK only)
1075  * @control.skip_table: skip externally configured rate table
1076  * @control.jiffies: timestamp for expiry on powersave clients
1077  * @control.vif: virtual interface (may be NULL)
1078  * @control.hw_key: key to encrypt with (may be NULL)
1079  * @control.flags: control flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_control_flags
1080  * @control.enqueue_time: enqueue time (for iTXQs)
1081  * @driver_rates: alias to @control.rates to reserve space
1082  * @pad: padding
1083  * @rate_driver_data: driver use area if driver needs @control.rates
1084  * @status: union part for status data
1085  * @status.rates: attempted rates
1086  * @status.ack_signal: ACK signal
1087  * @status.ampdu_ack_len: AMPDU ack length
1088  * @status.ampdu_len: AMPDU length
1089  * @status.antenna: (legacy, kept only for iwlegacy)
1090  * @status.tx_time: airtime consumed for transmission; note this is only
1091  *	used for WMM AC, not for airtime fairness
1092  * @status.flags: status flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_status_flags
1093  * @status.status_driver_data: driver use area
1094  * @ack: union part for pure ACK data
1095  * @ack.cookie: cookie for the ACK
1096  * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
1097  * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
1098  * 	relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
1099  * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
1100  * 	relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
1101  * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
1102  */
1103 struct ieee80211_tx_info {
1104 	/* common information */
1105 	u32 flags;
1106 	u32 band:3,
1107 	    ack_frame_id:13,
1108 	    hw_queue:4,
1109 	    tx_time_est:10;
1110 	/* 2 free bits */
1111 
1112 	union {
1113 		struct {
1114 			union {
1115 				/* rate control */
1116 				struct {
1117 					struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
1118 						IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1119 					s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
1120 					u8 use_rts:1;
1121 					u8 use_cts_prot:1;
1122 					u8 short_preamble:1;
1123 					u8 skip_table:1;
1124 					/* 2 bytes free */
1125 				};
1126 				/* only needed before rate control */
1127 				unsigned long jiffies;
1128 			};
1129 			/* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
1130 			struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1131 			struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
1132 			u32 flags;
1133 			codel_time_t enqueue_time;
1134 		} control;
1135 		struct {
1136 			u64 cookie;
1137 		} ack;
1138 		struct {
1139 			struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1140 			s32 ack_signal;
1141 			u8 ampdu_ack_len;
1142 			u8 ampdu_len;
1143 			u8 antenna;
1144 			u16 tx_time;
1145 			u8 flags;
1146 			void *status_driver_data[18 / sizeof(void *)];
1147 		} status;
1148 		struct {
1149 			struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
1150 				IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1151 			u8 pad[4];
1152 
1153 			void *rate_driver_data[
1154 				IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1155 		};
1156 		void *driver_data[
1157 			IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1158 	};
1159 };
1160 
1161 static inline u16
ieee80211_info_set_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info * info,u16 tx_time_est)1162 ieee80211_info_set_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, u16 tx_time_est)
1163 {
1164 	/* We only have 10 bits in tx_time_est, so store airtime
1165 	 * in increments of 4us and clamp the maximum to 2**12-1
1166 	 */
1167 	info->tx_time_est = min_t(u16, tx_time_est, 4095) >> 2;
1168 	return info->tx_time_est << 2;
1169 }
1170 
1171 static inline u16
ieee80211_info_get_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info * info)1172 ieee80211_info_get_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1173 {
1174 	return info->tx_time_est << 2;
1175 }
1176 
1177 /***
1178  * struct ieee80211_rate_status - mrr stage for status path
1179  *
1180  * This struct is used in struct ieee80211_tx_status to provide drivers a
1181  * dynamic way to report about used rates and power levels per packet.
1182  *
1183  * @rate_idx The actual used rate.
1184  * @try_count How often the rate was tried.
1185  * @tx_power_idx An idx into the ieee80211_hw->tx_power_levels list of the
1186  * 	corresponding wifi hardware. The idx shall point to the power level
1187  * 	that was used when sending the packet.
1188  */
1189 struct ieee80211_rate_status {
1190 	struct rate_info rate_idx;
1191 	u8 try_count;
1192 	u8 tx_power_idx;
1193 };
1194 
1195 /**
1196  * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx status info for rate control
1197  *
1198  * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for
1199  * @info: Basic tx status information
1200  * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver)
1201  * @rates: Mrr stages that were used when sending the packet
1202  * @n_rates: Number of mrr stages (count of instances for @rates)
1203  * @free_list: list where processed skbs are stored to be free'd by the driver
1204  * @ack_hwtstamp: Hardware timestamp of the received ack in nanoseconds
1205  *	Only needed for Timing measurement and Fine timing measurement action
1206  *	frames. Only reported by devices that have timestamping enabled.
1207  */
1208 struct ieee80211_tx_status {
1209 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1210 	struct ieee80211_tx_info *info;
1211 	struct sk_buff *skb;
1212 	struct ieee80211_rate_status *rates;
1213 	ktime_t ack_hwtstamp;
1214 	u8 n_rates;
1215 
1216 	struct list_head *free_list;
1217 };
1218 
1219 /**
1220  * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
1221  *
1222  * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
1223  * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
1224  * and the ones generated by mac80211.
1225  *
1226  * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
1227  * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
1228  * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
1229  * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
1230  */
1231 struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
1232 	const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1233 	size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1234 	const u8 *common_ies;
1235 	size_t common_ie_len;
1236 };
1237 
1238 
IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff * skb)1239 static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1240 {
1241 	return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
1242 }
1243 
IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff * skb)1244 static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1245 {
1246 	return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
1247 }
1248 
1249 /**
1250  * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
1251  *
1252  * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
1253  *
1254  * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
1255  * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
1256  * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
1257  * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
1258  *
1259  * NOTE: While the rates array is kept intact, this will wipe all of the
1260  *	 driver_data fields in info, so it's up to the driver to restore
1261  *	 any fields it needs after calling this helper.
1262  */
1263 static inline void
ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info * info)1264 ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1265 {
1266 	int i;
1267 
1268 	BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1269 		     offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
1270 	BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1271 		     offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
1272 	BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
1273 	/* clear the rate counts */
1274 	for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
1275 		info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
1276 	memset_after(&info->status, 0, rates);
1277 }
1278 
1279 
1280 /**
1281  * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
1282  *
1283  * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1284  * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
1285  *	Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
1286  * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
1287  * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
1288  *	verification has been done by the hardware.
1289  * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame.
1290  *	If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
1291  *	hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
1292  * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this
1293  *	flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection.
1294  *	Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame
1295  *	is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set)
1296  * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did
1297  *	de-duplication by itself.
1298  * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
1299  *	the frame.
1300  * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
1301  *	the frame.
1302  * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1303  *	field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
1304  *	was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
1305  *	merging.
1306  * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1307  *	field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
1308  *	(including FCS) was received.
1309  * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1310  *	field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received.
1311  * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
1312  *	Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
1313  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
1314  *	number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
1315  *	each A-MPDU
1316  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
1317  *	subframes of a single A-MPDU
1318  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
1319  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
1320  *	on this subframe
1321  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
1322  *	is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
1323  * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was
1324  *	done by the hardware
1325  * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without
1326  *	processing it in any regular way.
1327  *	This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1328  *	them for sniffing purposes.
1329  * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except
1330  *	monitor interfaces.
1331  *	This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1332  *	them for sniffing purposes.
1333  * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
1334  *	subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
1335  *	All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
1336  *	if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
1337  *	the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
1338  *	deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
1339  *	subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
1340  *	either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
1341  *	interleaved with other frames.
1342  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
1343  *	radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
1344  *	the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
1345  * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before.
1346  *	This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as
1347  *	the first subframe.
1348  * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must
1349  *	be done in the hardware.
1350  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this
1351  *	frame
1352  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known
1353  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE: HE radiotap data is present
1354  *	(&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he, mac80211 will fill in
1355  *
1356  *	 - DATA3_DATA_MCS
1357  *	 - DATA3_DATA_DCM
1358  *	 - DATA3_CODING
1359  *	 - DATA5_GI
1360  *	 - DATA5_DATA_BW_RU_ALLOC
1361  *	 - DATA6_NSTS
1362  *	 - DATA3_STBC
1363  *
1364  *	from the RX info data, so leave those zeroed when building this data)
1365  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU: HE MU radiotap data is present
1366  *	(&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he_mu)
1367  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG: L-SIG radiotap data is present
1368  * @RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU: use the frame only for radiotap reporting, with
1369  *	the "0-length PSDU" field included there.  The value for it is
1370  *	in &struct ieee80211_rx_status.  Note that if this value isn't
1371  *	known the frame shouldn't be reported.
1372  * @RX_FLAG_8023: the frame has an 802.3 header (decap offload performed by
1373  *	hardware or driver)
1374  */
1375 enum mac80211_rx_flags {
1376 	RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR		= BIT(0),
1377 	RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED		= BIT(1),
1378 	RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START	= BIT(2),
1379 	RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED		= BIT(3),
1380 	RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED		= BIT(4),
1381 	RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC		= BIT(5),
1382 	RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC 	= BIT(6),
1383 	RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START		= BIT(7),
1384 	RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL		= BIT(8),
1385 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS		= BIT(9),
1386 	RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED		= BIT(10),
1387 	RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED		= BIT(11),
1388 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN	= BIT(12),
1389 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST		= BIT(13),
1390 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR	= BIT(14),
1391 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN	= BIT(15),
1392 	RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END		= BIT(16),
1393 	RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR		= BIT(17),
1394 	RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR		= BIT(18),
1395 	RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE		= BIT(19),
1396 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA	= BIT(20),
1397 	RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED		= BIT(21),
1398 	RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN		= BIT(22),
1399 	RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED		= BIT(23),
1400 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT		= BIT(24),
1401 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN	= BIT(25),
1402 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE		= BIT(26),
1403 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU		= BIT(27),
1404 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG		= BIT(28),
1405 	RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU			= BIT(29),
1406 	RX_FLAG_8023			= BIT(30),
1407 };
1408 
1409 /**
1410  * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags
1411  *
1412  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
1413  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
1414  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission,
1415  *	if the driver fills this value it should add
1416  *	%IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
1417  *	to @hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact.
1418  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
1419  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
1420  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
1421  */
1422 enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags {
1423 	RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE		= BIT(0),
1424 	RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI		= BIT(2),
1425 	RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF		= BIT(3),
1426 	RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK		= BIT(4) | BIT(5),
1427 	RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC		= BIT(6),
1428 	RX_ENC_FLAG_BF			= BIT(7),
1429 };
1430 
1431 #define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT		4
1432 
1433 enum mac80211_rx_encoding {
1434 	RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0,
1435 	RX_ENC_HT,
1436 	RX_ENC_VHT,
1437 	RX_ENC_HE,
1438 };
1439 
1440 /**
1441  * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1442  *
1443  * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1444  * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
1445  * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
1446  *
1447  * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1448  * 	(TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
1449  * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is
1450  *	needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache.
1451  * @ack_tx_hwtstamp: Hardware timestamp for the ack TX in nanoseconds. Only
1452  *	needed for Timing measurement and Fine timing measurement action frames.
1453  *	Only reported by devices that have timestamping enabled.
1454  * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1455  *	it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
1456  * @band: the active band when this frame was received
1457  * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
1458  *	This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed
1459  *	for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting.
1460  * @freq_offset: @freq has a positive offset of 500Khz.
1461  * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1462  *	unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1463  *	@IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
1464  * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1465  *	values were filled.
1466  * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1467  *	support dB or unspecified units)
1468  * @antenna: antenna used
1469  * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
1470  *	HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
1471  * @nss: number of streams (VHT and HE only)
1472  * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\*
1473  * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding
1474  * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw
1475  * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags
1476  * @he_ru: HE RU, from &enum nl80211_he_ru_alloc
1477  * @he_gi: HE GI, from &enum nl80211_he_gi
1478  * @he_dcm: HE DCM value
1479  * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
1480  * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1481  *	each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1482  * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
1483  * @zero_length_psdu_type: radiotap type of the 0-length PSDU
1484  * @link_valid: if the link which is identified by @link_id is valid. This flag
1485  *	is set only when connection is MLO.
1486  * @link_id: id of the link used to receive the packet. This is used along with
1487  *	@link_valid.
1488  */
1489 struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1490 	u64 mactime;
1491 	union {
1492 		u64 boottime_ns;
1493 		ktime_t ack_tx_hwtstamp;
1494 	};
1495 	u32 device_timestamp;
1496 	u32 ampdu_reference;
1497 	u32 flag;
1498 	u16 freq: 13, freq_offset: 1;
1499 	u8 enc_flags;
1500 	u8 encoding:2, bw:3, he_ru:3;
1501 	u8 he_gi:2, he_dcm:1;
1502 	u8 rate_idx;
1503 	u8 nss;
1504 	u8 rx_flags;
1505 	u8 band;
1506 	u8 antenna;
1507 	s8 signal;
1508 	u8 chains;
1509 	s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
1510 	u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
1511 	u8 zero_length_psdu_type;
1512 	u8 link_valid:1, link_id:4;
1513 };
1514 
1515 static inline u32
ieee80211_rx_status_to_khz(struct ieee80211_rx_status * rx_status)1516 ieee80211_rx_status_to_khz(struct ieee80211_rx_status *rx_status)
1517 {
1518 	return MHZ_TO_KHZ(rx_status->freq) +
1519 	       (rx_status->freq_offset ? 500 : 0);
1520 }
1521 
1522 /**
1523  * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
1524  * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
1525  *	(this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
1526  *	 bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
1527  * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
1528  *	alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
1529  *	description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1530  *	Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1531  * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1532  * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1533  * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1534  *	then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1535  *	@data field.
1536  * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1537  *	the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1538  *	length
1539  * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1540  *
1541  * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1542  * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1543  * data.
1544  */
1545 struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1546 	u32 present;
1547 	u8 align;
1548 	u8 oui[3];
1549 	u8 subns;
1550 	u8 pad;
1551 	u16 len;
1552 	u8 data[];
1553 } __packed;
1554 
1555 /**
1556  * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1557  *
1558  * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1559  *
1560  * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1561  *	to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1562  *	or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
1563  * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1564  *	This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1565  *	meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1566  *	transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1567  *	Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1568  *	driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1569  *	for more.
1570  * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1571  *	the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1572  *	may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1573  *	be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1574  *	it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
1575  * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1576  *	operating channel.
1577  */
1578 enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
1579 	IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR		= (1<<0),
1580 	IEEE80211_CONF_PS		= (1<<1),
1581 	IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE		= (1<<2),
1582 	IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL	= (1<<3),
1583 };
1584 
1585 
1586 /**
1587  * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1588  *
1589  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
1590  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
1591  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
1592  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
1593  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
1594  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
1595  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
1596  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
1597  *	Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1598  *	otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1599  */
1600 enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
1601 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS		= BIT(1),
1602 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL	= BIT(2),
1603 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR		= BIT(3),
1604 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS		= BIT(4),
1605 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER		= BIT(5),
1606 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL		= BIT(6),
1607 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS	= BIT(7),
1608 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE		= BIT(8),
1609 };
1610 
1611 /**
1612  * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1613  *
1614  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1615  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1616  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1617  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1618  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
1619  */
1620 enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1621 	IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1622 	IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1623 	IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1624 	IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1625 
1626 	/* keep last */
1627 	IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1628 };
1629 
1630 /**
1631  * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1632  *
1633  * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1634  *
1635  * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1636  *
1637  * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
1638  * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1639  *	in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1640  *	has been received and the DTIM period is known.
1641  * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1642  *	powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1643  *	the CONF_PS flag is set.
1644  *
1645  * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1646  *	value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
1647  *
1648  * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
1649  * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
1650  *
1651  * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
1652  *	(a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1653  *	but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
1654  * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
1655  *	frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1656  *	number of transmissions not the number of retries
1657  *
1658  * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1659  *	%IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
1660  *	configured for an HT channel.
1661  *	Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1662  *	otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1663  */
1664 struct ieee80211_conf {
1665 	u32 flags;
1666 	int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
1667 
1668 	u16 listen_interval;
1669 	u8 ps_dtim_period;
1670 
1671 	u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1672 
1673 	struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1674 	bool radar_enabled;
1675 	enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
1676 };
1677 
1678 /**
1679  * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1680  *
1681  * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1682  * operation.
1683  *
1684  * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1685  *	Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1686  *	announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1687  *	the driver passed into mac80211.
1688  * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1689  *	rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
1690  * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1691  *	scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
1692  * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
1693  * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1694  * @delay: maximum delay between the time the AP transmitted the last beacon in
1695   *	current channel and the expected time of the first beacon in the new
1696   *	channel, expressed in TU.
1697  */
1698 struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1699 	u64 timestamp;
1700 	u32 device_timestamp;
1701 	bool block_tx;
1702 	struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1703 	u8 count;
1704 	u32 delay;
1705 };
1706 
1707 /**
1708  * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1709  *
1710  * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1711  *	on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
1712  * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1713  *	monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1714  *	connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1715  *	provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
1716  * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1717  *	interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1718  *	but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1719  *	only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
1720  * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes
1721  *	and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even
1722  *	this is not pure P2P vif.
1723  */
1724 enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1725 	IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER		= BIT(0),
1726 	IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI		= BIT(1),
1727 	IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD		= BIT(2),
1728 	IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE		= BIT(3),
1729 };
1730 
1731 
1732 /**
1733  * enum ieee80211_offload_flags - virtual interface offload flags
1734  *
1735  * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED: tx encapsulation offload is enabled
1736  *	The driver supports sending frames passed as 802.3 frames by mac80211.
1737  *	It must also support sending 802.11 packets for the same interface.
1738  * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR: support 4-address mode encapsulation offload
1739  * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_DECAP_ENABLED: rx encapsulation offload is enabled
1740  *	The driver supports passing received 802.11 frames as 802.3 frames to
1741  *	mac80211.
1742  */
1743 
1744 enum ieee80211_offload_flags {
1745 	IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED		= BIT(0),
1746 	IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR		= BIT(1),
1747 	IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_DECAP_ENABLED		= BIT(2),
1748 };
1749 
1750 /**
1751  * struct ieee80211_vif_cfg - interface configuration
1752  * @assoc: association status
1753  * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS or not
1754  * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
1755  * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
1756  *	offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
1757  * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
1758  * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
1759  *	may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
1760  *	The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
1761  *	to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
1762  * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
1763  *	may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
1764  *	array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
1765  * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
1766  * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
1767  * @s1g: BSS is S1G BSS (affects Association Request format).
1768  * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
1769  *	hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
1770  *	your driver/device needs to do.
1771  * @ap_addr: AP MLD address, or BSSID for non-MLO connections
1772  *	(station mode only)
1773  */
1774 struct ieee80211_vif_cfg {
1775 	/* association related data */
1776 	bool assoc, ibss_joined;
1777 	bool ibss_creator;
1778 	bool ps;
1779 	u16 aid;
1780 
1781 	__be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
1782 	int arp_addr_cnt;
1783 	u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
1784 	size_t ssid_len;
1785 	bool s1g;
1786 	bool idle;
1787 	u8 ap_addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
1788 };
1789 
1790 /**
1791  * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1792  *
1793  * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1794  * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1795  *
1796  * @type: type of this virtual interface
1797  * @cfg: vif configuration, see &struct ieee80211_vif_cfg
1798  * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1799  *	or the BSS we're associated to
1800  * @link_conf: in case of MLD, the per-link BSS configuration,
1801  *	indexed by link ID
1802  * @valid_links: bitmap of valid links, or 0 for non-MLO.
1803  * @active_links: The bitmap of active links, or 0 for non-MLO.
1804  *	The driver shouldn't change this directly, but use the
1805  *	API calls meant for that purpose.
1806  * @addr: address of this interface
1807  * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1808  *	interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
1809  * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1810  *	these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1811  *	or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1812  *	at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
1813  * @offload_flags: hardware offload capabilities/flags for this interface.
1814  *	These are initialized by mac80211 before calling .add_interface,
1815  *	.change_interface or .update_vif_offload and updated by the driver
1816  *	within these ops, based on supported features or runtime change
1817  *	restrictions.
1818  * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1819  * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
1820  * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
1821  *	interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
1822  *	monitor interface (if that is requested.)
1823  * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this
1824  *	interface.
1825  * @rx_mcast_action_reg: multicast Action frames should be reported to mac80211
1826  *	for this interface.
1827  * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1828  *	sizeof(void \*).
1829  * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
1830  * @txqs_stopped: per AC flag to indicate that intermediate TXQs are stopped,
1831  *	protected by fq->lock.
1832  * @offload_flags: 802.3 -> 802.11 enapsulation offload flags, see
1833  *	&enum ieee80211_offload_flags.
1834  * @mbssid_tx_vif: Pointer to the transmitting interface if MBSSID is enabled.
1835  */
1836 struct ieee80211_vif {
1837 	enum nl80211_iftype type;
1838 	struct ieee80211_vif_cfg cfg;
1839 	struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
1840 	struct ieee80211_bss_conf __rcu *link_conf[IEEE80211_MLD_MAX_NUM_LINKS];
1841 	u16 valid_links, active_links;
1842 	u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
1843 	bool p2p;
1844 
1845 	u8 cab_queue;
1846 	u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1847 
1848 	struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
1849 
1850 	u32 driver_flags;
1851 	u32 offload_flags;
1852 
1853 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1854 	struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1855 #endif
1856 
1857 	bool probe_req_reg;
1858 	bool rx_mcast_action_reg;
1859 
1860 	bool txqs_stopped[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1861 
1862 	struct ieee80211_vif *mbssid_tx_vif;
1863 
1864 	/* must be last */
1865 	u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1866 };
1867 
1868 #define for_each_vif_active_link(vif, link, link_id)				\
1869 	for (link_id = 0; link_id < ARRAY_SIZE((vif)->link_conf); link_id++)	\
1870 		if ((!(vif)->active_links ||					\
1871 		     (vif)->active_links & BIT(link_id)) &&			\
1872 		    (link = rcu_dereference((vif)->link_conf[link_id])))
1873 
ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif * vif)1874 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1875 {
1876 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
1877 	return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
1878 #endif
1879 	return false;
1880 }
1881 
1882 /**
1883  * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1884  * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1885  *
1886  * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1887  * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1888  *
1889  * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1890  * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1891  * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1892  */
1893 struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1894 
1895 /**
1896  * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
1897  * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
1898  *
1899  * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1900  * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
1901  * This can also be useful to get the netdev associated to a vif.
1902  */
1903 struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
1904 
1905 /**
1906  * lockdep_vif_mutex_held - for lockdep checks on link poiners
1907  * @vif: the interface to check
1908  */
lockdep_vif_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_vif * vif)1909 static inline bool lockdep_vif_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1910 {
1911 	return lockdep_is_held(&ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(vif)->mtx);
1912 }
1913 
1914 #define link_conf_dereference_protected(vif, link_id)		\
1915 	rcu_dereference_protected((vif)->link_conf[link_id],	\
1916 				  lockdep_vif_mutex_held(vif))
1917 
1918 /**
1919  * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1920  *
1921  * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1922  * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1923  *
1924  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1925  *	driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
1926  *	particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1927  *	will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
1928  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1929  *	the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1930  *	generation in software.
1931  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1932  *	that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
1933  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
1934  *	CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
1935  *	(MFP) to be done in software.
1936  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
1937  *	if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
1938  *	itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
1939  *	@IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1940  *	not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1941  *	MIC.
1942  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1943  *	management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1944  *	crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1945  *	properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1946  *	fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1947  *	RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1948  *	%IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
1949  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
1950  *	driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
1951  *	only for management frames (MFP).
1952  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1953  *	driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1954  *	be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
1955  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for
1956  *	a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with
1957  *	@IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key.
1958  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX: Key needs explicit Tx activation.
1959  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE: This flag should be set by the driver
1960  *	for a AES_CMAC key to indicate that it requires sequence number
1961  *	generation only
1962  */
1963 enum ieee80211_key_flags {
1964 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT	= BIT(0),
1965 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV		= BIT(1),
1966 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC	= BIT(2),
1967 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE		= BIT(3),
1968 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX		= BIT(4),
1969 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE		= BIT(5),
1970 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT		= BIT(6),
1971 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM	= BIT(7),
1972 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE	= BIT(8),
1973 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX		= BIT(9),
1974 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE	= BIT(10),
1975 };
1976 
1977 /**
1978  * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1979  *
1980  * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1981  * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1982  *
1983  * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1984  *	wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
1985  *	encrypted in hardware.
1986  * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
1987  * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it
1988  *	needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO)
1989  * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1990  * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1991  * @keylen: key material length
1992  * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1993  * 	data block:
1994  * 	- Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1995  * 	- Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1996  * 	- Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
1997  * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1998  * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
1999  * @link_id: the link ID for MLO, or -1 for non-MLO or pairwise keys
2000  */
2001 struct ieee80211_key_conf {
2002 	atomic64_t tx_pn;
2003 	u32 cipher;
2004 	u8 icv_len;
2005 	u8 iv_len;
2006 	u8 hw_key_idx;
2007 	s8 keyidx;
2008 	u16 flags;
2009 	s8 link_id;
2010 	u8 keylen;
2011 	u8 key[];
2012 };
2013 
2014 #define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN	16
2015 
2016 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff))
2017 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff))
2018 
2019 /**
2020  * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
2021  *
2022  * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
2023  * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
2024  *	reverse order than in packet)
2025  * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
2026  *	reverse order than in packet)
2027  * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
2028  *	reverse order than in packet)
2029  * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
2030  *	reverse order than in packet)
2031  * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys
2032  */
2033 struct ieee80211_key_seq {
2034 	union {
2035 		struct {
2036 			u32 iv32;
2037 			u16 iv16;
2038 		} tkip;
2039 		struct {
2040 			u8 pn[6];
2041 		} ccmp;
2042 		struct {
2043 			u8 pn[6];
2044 		} aes_cmac;
2045 		struct {
2046 			u8 pn[6];
2047 		} aes_gmac;
2048 		struct {
2049 			u8 pn[6];
2050 		} gcmp;
2051 		struct {
2052 			u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN];
2053 			u8 seq_len;
2054 		} hw;
2055 	};
2056 };
2057 
2058 /**
2059  * enum set_key_cmd - key command
2060  *
2061  * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
2062  * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
2063  *
2064  * @SET_KEY: a key is set
2065  * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
2066  */
2067 enum set_key_cmd {
2068 	SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
2069 };
2070 
2071 /**
2072  * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
2073  *
2074  * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
2075  *	this is a special state for add/remove transitions
2076  * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
2077  * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
2078  * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
2079  * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
2080  */
2081 enum ieee80211_sta_state {
2082 	/* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
2083 	IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
2084 	IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
2085 	IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
2086 	IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
2087 	IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
2088 };
2089 
2090 /**
2091  * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
2092  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
2093  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
2094  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
2095  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
2096  *	(including 80+80 MHz)
2097  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_320: station can receive up to 320 MHz
2098  *
2099  * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
2100  *	correctly, the values must be sorted.
2101  */
2102 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
2103 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
2104 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
2105 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
2106 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
2107 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_320,
2108 };
2109 
2110 /**
2111  * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
2112  *
2113  * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
2114  * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
2115  *	Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
2116  */
2117 struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
2118 	struct rcu_head rcu_head;
2119 	struct {
2120 		s8 idx;
2121 		u8 count;
2122 		u8 count_cts;
2123 		u8 count_rts;
2124 		u16 flags;
2125 	} rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
2126 };
2127 
2128 /**
2129  * struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr - station txpower configuration
2130  *
2131  * Used to configure txpower for station.
2132  *
2133  * @power: indicates the tx power, in dBm, to be used when sending data frames
2134  *	to the STA.
2135  * @type: In particular if TPC %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED then tx power
2136  *	will be less than or equal to specified from userspace, whereas if TPC
2137  *	%type is NL80211_TX_POWER_AUTOMATIC then it indicates default tx power.
2138  *	NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED is not a valid configuration option for
2139  *	per peer TPC.
2140  */
2141 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr {
2142 	s16 power;
2143 	enum nl80211_tx_power_setting type;
2144 };
2145 
2146 /**
2147  * struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates - info that is aggregated from active links
2148  *
2149  * Used for any per-link data that needs to be aggregated and updated in the
2150  * main &struct ieee80211_sta when updated or the active links change.
2151  *
2152  * @max_amsdu_len: indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes.
2153  *	This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble.
2154  *	For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply:
2155  *
2156  *	* If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the
2157  *	  A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes.
2158  *	* If the skb is not part of a BA agreement, the A-MSDU maximal
2159  *	  size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes.
2160  *
2161  * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level
2162  * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section
2163  * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2).
2164  * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control.
2165  * @max_tid_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes for this TID
2166  */
2167 struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates {
2168 	u16 max_amsdu_len;
2169 
2170 	u16 max_rc_amsdu_len;
2171 	u16 max_tid_amsdu_len[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS];
2172 };
2173 
2174 /**
2175  * struct ieee80211_link_sta - station Link specific info
2176  * All link specific info for a STA link for a non MLD STA(single)
2177  * or a MLD STA(multiple entries) are stored here.
2178  *
2179  * @addr: MAC address of the Link STA. For non-MLO STA this is same as the addr
2180  *	in ieee80211_sta. For MLO Link STA this addr can be same or different
2181  *	from addr in ieee80211_sta (representing MLD STA addr)
2182  * @link_id: the link ID for this link STA (0 for deflink)
2183  * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
2184  * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates
2185  * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
2186  * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
2187  * @he_cap: HE capabilities of this STA
2188  * @he_6ghz_capa: on 6 GHz, holds the HE 6 GHz band capabilities
2189  * @eht_cap: EHT capabilities of this STA
2190  * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
2191  * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
2192  *	station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
2193  *	notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
2194  *	the station moves to associated state.
2195  * @txpwr: the station tx power configuration
2196  *
2197  */
2198 struct ieee80211_link_sta {
2199 	u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
2200 	u8 link_id;
2201 	enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
2202 
2203 	u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
2204 	struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
2205 	struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
2206 	struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap he_cap;
2207 	struct ieee80211_he_6ghz_capa he_6ghz_capa;
2208 	struct ieee80211_sta_eht_cap eht_cap;
2209 
2210 	struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates agg;
2211 
2212 	u8 rx_nss;
2213 	enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
2214 	struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr txpwr;
2215 };
2216 
2217 /**
2218  * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
2219  *
2220  * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
2221  * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
2222  * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
2223  * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
2224  * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
2225  * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
2226  * This also represents the MLD STA in case of MLO association
2227  * and holds pointers to various link STA's
2228  *
2229  * @addr: MAC address
2230  * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
2231  * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU
2232  *	that this station is allowed to transmit to us.
2233  *	Can be modified by driver.
2234  * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
2235  *	otherwise always false)
2236  * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
2237  *	sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information.
2238  * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
2239  *	if wme is supported. The bits order is like in
2240  *	IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*.
2241  * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
2242  * @rates: rate control selection table
2243  * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
2244  * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
2245  *	valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
2246  * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
2247  * @mlo: indicates whether the STA is MLO station.
2248  * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single
2249  *	A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means
2250  *	unlimited.
2251  * @cur: currently valid data as aggregated from the active links
2252  *	For non MLO STA it will point to the deflink data. For MLO STA
2253  *	ieee80211_sta_recalc_aggregates() must be called to update it.
2254  * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not.
2255  * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction); note that
2256  *	the last entry (%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS) is used for non-data frames
2257  * @deflink: This holds the default link STA information, for non MLO STA all link
2258  *	specific STA information is accessed through @deflink or through
2259  *	link[0] which points to address of @deflink. For MLO Link STA
2260  *	the first added link STA will point to deflink.
2261  * @link: reference to Link Sta entries. For Non MLO STA, except 1st link,
2262  *	i.e link[0] all links would be assigned to NULL by default and
2263  *	would access link information via @deflink or link[0]. For MLO
2264  *	STA, first link STA being added will point its link pointer to
2265  *	@deflink address and remaining would be allocated and the address
2266  *	would be assigned to link[link_id] where link_id is the id assigned
2267  *	by the AP.
2268  * @valid_links: bitmap of valid links, or 0 for non-MLO
2269  */
2270 struct ieee80211_sta {
2271 	u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
2272 	u16 aid;
2273 	u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2274 	bool wme;
2275 	u8 uapsd_queues;
2276 	u8 max_sp;
2277 	struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
2278 	bool tdls;
2279 	bool tdls_initiator;
2280 	bool mfp;
2281 	bool mlo;
2282 	u8 max_amsdu_subframes;
2283 
2284 	struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates *cur;
2285 
2286 	bool support_p2p_ps;
2287 
2288 	struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS + 1];
2289 
2290 	u16 valid_links;
2291 	struct ieee80211_link_sta deflink;
2292 	struct ieee80211_link_sta __rcu *link[IEEE80211_MLD_MAX_NUM_LINKS];
2293 
2294 	/* must be last */
2295 	u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2296 };
2297 
2298 #ifdef CONFIG_LOCKDEP
2299 bool lockdep_sta_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
2300 #else
lockdep_sta_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_sta * pubsta)2301 static inline bool lockdep_sta_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta)
2302 {
2303 	return true;
2304 }
2305 #endif
2306 
2307 #define link_sta_dereference_protected(sta, link_id)		\
2308 	rcu_dereference_protected((sta)->link[link_id],		\
2309 				  lockdep_sta_mutex_held(sta))
2310 
2311 #define for_each_sta_active_link(vif, sta, link_sta, link_id)			\
2312 	for (link_id = 0; link_id < ARRAY_SIZE((sta)->link); link_id++)		\
2313 		if ((!(vif)->active_links ||					\
2314 		     (vif)->active_links & BIT(link_id)) &&			\
2315 		    ((link_sta) = link_sta_dereference_protected(sta, link_id)))
2316 
2317 /**
2318  * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
2319  *
2320  * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
2321  * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
2322  *
2323  * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
2324  * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
2325  */
2326 enum sta_notify_cmd {
2327 	STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
2328 };
2329 
2330 /**
2331  * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
2332  *
2333  * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
2334  * 	it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
2335  */
2336 struct ieee80211_tx_control {
2337 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2338 };
2339 
2340 /**
2341  * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
2342  *
2343  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
2344  * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
2345  * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue),
2346  *	%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS for non-data (if enabled)
2347  * @ac: the AC for this queue
2348  * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size
2349  *
2350  * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
2351  * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
2352  */
2353 struct ieee80211_txq {
2354 	struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
2355 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2356 	u8 tid;
2357 	u8 ac;
2358 
2359 	/* must be last */
2360 	u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2361 };
2362 
2363 /**
2364  * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
2365  *
2366  * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
2367  * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
2368  * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
2369  * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
2370  * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
2371  *
2372  * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
2373  *	The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
2374  *	controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
2375  *	should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
2376  *	will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
2377  *	algorithm.
2378  *	Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
2379  *	callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
2380  *	the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
2381  *	@use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
2382  *	timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
2383  *	CCK frames.
2384  *
2385  * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
2386  *	Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
2387  *	the FCS at the end.
2388  *
2389  * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
2390  *	Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
2391  *	for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
2392  *	rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
2393  *	to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
2394  *	multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
2395  *	the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
2396  *
2397  * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
2398  *	Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
2399  *	expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
2400  *	If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
2401  *
2402  * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
2403  *	Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
2404  *	one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
2405  *	between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
2406  *
2407  * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
2408  * 	Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
2409  * 	Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
2410  *
2411  * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
2412  *	Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
2413  *
2414  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
2415  *	Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
2416  *
2417  * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
2418  *	Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
2419  *	stack support for dynamic PS.
2420  *
2421  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
2422  *	Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
2423  *
2424  * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
2425  *	Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
2426  *
2427  * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
2428  *	Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
2429  *	the stack.
2430  *
2431  * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
2432  *	The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
2433  *	periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
2434  *
2435  * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
2436  *	This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
2437  *	dtim_period).
2438  *
2439  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
2440  *	per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
2441  *	the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
2442  *	to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
2443  *	possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
2444  *	only in that case.
2445  *
2446  * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
2447  *	autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
2448  *	this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
2449  *	stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
2450  *	Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
2451  *	the PS mode of connected stations.
2452  *
2453  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
2454  *	setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
2455  *	software.
2456  *
2457  * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
2458  *	a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
2459  *	active interfaces.
2460  *
2461  * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
2462  *	be created.  It is expected user-space will create vifs as
2463  *	desired (and thus have them named as desired).
2464  *
2465  * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
2466  *	crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
2467  *	try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
2468  *	the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
2469  *	supported cipher suites.
2470  *
2471  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
2472  *	this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
2473  *	for frames.
2474  *
2475  * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
2476  *	queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
2477  *	for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
2478  *	control for more details.
2479  *
2480  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
2481  *	selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
2482  *
2483  * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
2484  *	P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
2485  *	is supported.
2486  *
2487  * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
2488  *	only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
2489  *
2490  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
2491  *	and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
2492  *	using aggregation for such frames.)
2493  *
2494  * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
2495  *	for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
2496  *	is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
2497  *	CSA frame.
2498  *
2499  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
2500  *	or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
2501  *
2502  * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
2503  *	in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
2504  *
2505  * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth
2506  *	than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel.
2507  *
2508  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs
2509  *	within A-MPDU.
2510  *
2511  * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status
2512  *	for sent beacons.
2513  *
2514  * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each
2515  *	station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified
2516  *	by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station
2517  *	from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time.
2518  *
2519  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the
2520  *	reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in
2521  *	order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session
2522  *	timeout.
2523  *
2524  * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX,
2525  *	which implies using per-CPU station statistics.
2526  *
2527  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated
2528  *	A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support.
2529  *	When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must
2530  *	limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting
2531  *	max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta.
2532  *
2533  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list
2534  *	skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU.
2535  *
2536  * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event
2537  *	by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such
2538  *	drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver
2539  *	is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout.
2540  *
2541  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself.
2542  *	The stack will not do fragmentation.
2543  *	The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well.
2544  *
2545  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on
2546  *	TDLS links.
2547  *
2548  * @IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP: The driver requires the
2549  *	mgd_prepare_tx() callback to be called before transmission of a
2550  *	deauthentication frame in case the association was completed but no
2551  *	beacon was heard. This is required in multi-channel scenarios, where the
2552  *	virtual interface might not be given air time for the transmission of
2553  *	the frame, as it is not synced with the AP/P2P GO yet, and thus the
2554  *	deauthentication frame might not be transmitted.
2555  *
2556  * @IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP: The driver (or firmware) doesn't
2557  *	support QoS NDP for AP probing - that's most likely a driver bug.
2558  *
2559  * @IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ: use the TXQ for bufferable MMPDUs, this of
2560  *	course requires the driver to use TXQs to start with.
2561  *
2562  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: (Hardware) rate control supports VHT
2563  *	extended NSS BW (dot11VHTExtendedNSSBWCapable). This flag will be set if
2564  *	the selected rate control algorithm sets %RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW
2565  *	but if the rate control is built-in then it must be set by the driver.
2566  *	See also the documentation for that flag.
2567  *
2568  * @IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ: use the extra non-TID per-station TXQ for all
2569  *	MMPDUs on station interfaces. This of course requires the driver to use
2570  *	TXQs to start with.
2571  *
2572  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN: Driver does not report accurate A-MPDU
2573  *	length in tx status information
2574  *
2575  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2576  *
2577  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2578  *	only for HE APs. Applies if @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID is set.
2579  *
2580  * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT: The card and driver is only
2581  *	aggregating MPDUs with the same keyid, allowing mac80211 to keep Tx
2582  *	A-MPDU sessions active while rekeying with Extended Key ID.
2583  *
2584  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports tx encapsulation
2585  *	offload
2586  *
2587  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RX_DECAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports rx decapsulation
2588  *	offload
2589  *
2590  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CONC_MON_RX_DECAP: Hardware supports concurrent rx
2591  *	decapsulation offload and passing raw 802.11 frames for monitor iface.
2592  *	If this is supported, the driver must pass both 802.3 frames for real
2593  *	usage and 802.11 frames with %RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR set for monitor to
2594  *	the stack.
2595  *
2596  * @IEEE80211_HW_DETECTS_COLOR_COLLISION: HW/driver has support for BSS color
2597  *	collision detection and doesn't need it in software.
2598  *
2599  * @IEEE80211_HW_MLO_MCAST_MULTI_LINK_TX: Hardware/driver handles transmitting
2600  *	multicast frames on all links, mac80211 should not do that.
2601  *
2602  * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays
2603  */
2604 enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
2605 	IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL,
2606 	IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS,
2607 	IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING,
2608 	IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC,
2609 	IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM,
2610 	IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC,
2611 	IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT,
2612 	IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION,
2613 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS,
2614 	IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK,
2615 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS,
2616 	IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE,
2617 	IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF,
2618 	IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF,
2619 	IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL,
2620 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT,
2621 	IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS,
2622 	IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR,
2623 	IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL,
2624 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK,
2625 	IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS,
2626 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW,
2627 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE,
2628 	IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF,
2629 	IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY,
2630 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES,
2631 	IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA,
2632 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS,
2633 	IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS,
2634 	IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW,
2635 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU,
2636 	IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS,
2637 	IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR,
2638 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER,
2639 	IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS,
2640 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU,
2641 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST,
2642 	IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK,
2643 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG,
2644 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA,
2645 	IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP,
2646 	IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP,
2647 	IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ,
2648 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW,
2649 	IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ,
2650 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN,
2651 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID,
2652 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID,
2653 	IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT,
2654 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD,
2655 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RX_DECAP_OFFLOAD,
2656 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CONC_MON_RX_DECAP,
2657 	IEEE80211_HW_DETECTS_COLOR_COLLISION,
2658 	IEEE80211_HW_MLO_MCAST_MULTI_LINK_TX,
2659 
2660 	/* keep last, obviously */
2661 	NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS
2662 };
2663 
2664 /**
2665  * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
2666  *
2667  * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
2668  * information for an 802.11 PHY.
2669  *
2670  * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
2671  *	802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
2672  *	members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
2673  *	and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
2674  *	bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
2675  *
2676  * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
2677  *
2678  * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
2679  *	along with this structure.
2680  *
2681  * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
2682  *
2683  * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
2684  *	for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
2685  *
2686  * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
2687  *	Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
2688  *
2689  * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
2690  *	only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
2691  *
2692  * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
2693  *	that HW supports
2694  *
2695  * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
2696  *	data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
2697  *	queues need to have configurable access parameters.
2698  *
2699  * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
2700  *	If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
2701  *	set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
2702  *
2703  * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2704  *	within &struct ieee80211_vif.
2705  * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2706  *	within &struct ieee80211_sta.
2707  * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2708  *	within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
2709  * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2710  *	within @struct ieee80211_txq.
2711  *
2712  * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
2713  *	can handle.
2714  * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
2715  *	the hw can report back.
2716  * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
2717  *
2718  * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
2719  *	sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
2720  *	aggregation.
2721  *	This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
2722  *	number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
2723  *	it shouldn't be set.
2724  *
2725  * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
2726  *	aggregate an HT/HE device will transmit. In HT AddBA we'll
2727  *	advertise a constant value of 64 as some older APs crash if
2728  *	the window size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N
2729  *	with FW v1.0.07 build 002 Jun 18 2012).
2730  *	For AddBA to HE capable peers this value will be used.
2731  *
2732  * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum
2733  *	of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list.
2734  *
2735  * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
2736  *	(if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
2737  *
2738  * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
2739  *	reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
2740  *	include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only
2741  *	adding _BW is supported today.
2742  *
2743  * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
2744  *	the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
2745  *	Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values.
2746  *
2747  * @radiotap_he: HE radiotap validity flags
2748  *
2749  * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the
2750  *	@units_pos member is set to a non-negative value then the timestamp
2751  *	field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status
2752  *	device_timestamp.
2753  * @radiotap_timestamp.units_pos: Must be set to a combination of a
2754  *	IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a
2755  *	IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value.
2756  * @radiotap_timestamp.accuracy: If non-negative, fills the accuracy in the
2757  *	radiotap field and the accuracy known flag will be set.
2758  *
2759  * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
2760  *	from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
2761  *	other features will be rejected during HW registration.
2762  *
2763  * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
2764  *	for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
2765  *	enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
2766  *	Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
2767  *	that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
2768  *	neither enabled.
2769  *
2770  * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
2771  *	deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
2772  *	Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
2773  *
2774  * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the
2775  *	device.
2776  *
2777  * @tx_sk_pacing_shift: Pacing shift to set on TCP sockets when frames from
2778  *	them are encountered. The default should typically not be changed,
2779  *	unless the driver has good reasons for needing more buffers.
2780  *
2781  * @weight_multiplier: Driver specific airtime weight multiplier used while
2782  *	refilling deficit of each TXQ.
2783  *
2784  * @max_mtu: the max mtu could be set.
2785  *
2786  * @tx_power_levels: a list of power levels supported by the wifi hardware.
2787  * 	The power levels can be specified either as integer or fractions.
2788  * 	The power level at idx 0 shall be the maximum positive power level.
2789  *
2790  * @max_txpwr_levels_idx: the maximum valid idx of 'tx_power_levels' list.
2791  */
2792 struct ieee80211_hw {
2793 	struct ieee80211_conf conf;
2794 	struct wiphy *wiphy;
2795 	const char *rate_control_algorithm;
2796 	void *priv;
2797 	unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)];
2798 	unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
2799 	unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
2800 	int vif_data_size;
2801 	int sta_data_size;
2802 	int chanctx_data_size;
2803 	int txq_data_size;
2804 	u16 queues;
2805 	u16 max_listen_interval;
2806 	s8 max_signal;
2807 	u8 max_rates;
2808 	u8 max_report_rates;
2809 	u8 max_rate_tries;
2810 	u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2811 	u16 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
2812 	u8 max_tx_fragments;
2813 	u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
2814 	u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
2815 	u16 radiotap_vht_details;
2816 	struct {
2817 		int units_pos;
2818 		s16 accuracy;
2819 	} radiotap_timestamp;
2820 	netdev_features_t netdev_features;
2821 	u8 uapsd_queues;
2822 	u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
2823 	u8 max_nan_de_entries;
2824 	u8 tx_sk_pacing_shift;
2825 	u8 weight_multiplier;
2826 	u32 max_mtu;
2827 	const s8 *tx_power_levels;
2828 	u8 max_txpwr_levels_idx;
2829 };
2830 
_ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)2831 static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2832 				       enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2833 {
2834 	return test_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2835 }
2836 #define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg)	_ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2837 
_ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)2838 static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2839 				     enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2840 {
2841 	return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2842 }
2843 #define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg)	_ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2844 
2845 /**
2846  * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
2847  *
2848  * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
2849  * @req: cfg80211 request.
2850  */
2851 struct ieee80211_scan_request {
2852 	struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
2853 
2854 	/* Keep last */
2855 	struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
2856 };
2857 
2858 /**
2859  * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
2860  *
2861  * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
2862  * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
2863  * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
2864  * @status: channel-switch response status
2865  * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
2866  * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2867  * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2868  * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
2869  * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
2870  */
2871 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
2872 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2873 	struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
2874 	u8 action_code;
2875 	u32 status;
2876 	u32 timestamp;
2877 	u16 switch_time;
2878 	u16 switch_timeout;
2879 	struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
2880 	u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
2881 };
2882 
2883 /**
2884  * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
2885  *
2886  * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
2887  *
2888  * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
2889  * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
2890  * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
2891  * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
2892  * is already used internally by mac80211.
2893  *
2894  * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
2895  */
2896 struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
2897 
2898 /**
2899  * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
2900  *
2901  * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
2902  * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
2903  */
SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct device * dev)2904 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
2905 {
2906 	set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
2907 }
2908 
2909 /**
2910  * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
2911  *
2912  * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
2913  * @addr: the address to set
2914  */
SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,const u8 * addr)2915 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr)
2916 {
2917 	memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
2918 }
2919 
2920 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw * hw,const struct ieee80211_tx_info * c)2921 ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2922 		      const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2923 {
2924 	if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
2925 		return NULL;
2926 	return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
2927 }
2928 
2929 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw * hw,const struct ieee80211_tx_info * c)2930 ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2931 			   const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2932 {
2933 	if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
2934 		return NULL;
2935 	return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
2936 }
2937 
2938 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw * hw,const struct ieee80211_tx_info * c,int idx)2939 ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2940 			     const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
2941 {
2942 	if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
2943 		return NULL;
2944 	return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
2945 }
2946 
2947 /**
2948  * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
2949  * @hw: the hardware
2950  * @skb: the skb
2951  *
2952  * Free a transmit skb. Use this function when some failure
2953  * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
2954  */
2955 void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
2956 
2957 /**
2958  * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
2959  *
2960  * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
2961  * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
2962  *
2963  * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
2964  * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
2965  * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
2966  * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
2967  * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
2968  * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
2969  * VLANs are configured for an access point.
2970  *
2971  * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
2972  * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
2973  * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
2974  *
2975  * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
2976  * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
2977  * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
2978  * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
2979  *
2980  * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
2981  * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
2982  * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
2983  * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
2984  *
2985  * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
2986  *
2987  * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
2988  * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
2989  * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
2990  * based on the receive flags.
2991  *
2992  * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
2993  * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
2994  * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
2995  * keys.
2996  *
2997  * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
2998  * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
2999  * handler.
3000  * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
3001  * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
3002  * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
3003  * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
3004  * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
3005  * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
3006  *
3007  * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
3008  * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
3009  * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
3010  *
3011  * Mac80211 drivers should set the @NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_CAN_REPLACE_PTK0 flag
3012  * when they are able to replace in-use PTK keys according to the following
3013  * requirements:
3014  * 1) They do not hand over frames decrypted with the old key to mac80211
3015       once the call to set_key() with command %DISABLE_KEY has been completed,
3016    2) either drop or continue to use the old key for any outgoing frames queued
3017       at the time of the key deletion (including re-transmits),
3018    3) never send out a frame queued prior to the set_key() %SET_KEY command
3019       encrypted with the new key when also needing
3020       @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV and
3021    4) never send out a frame unencrypted when it should be encrypted.
3022    Mac80211 will not queue any new frames for a deleted key to the driver.
3023  */
3024 
3025 /**
3026  * DOC: Powersave support
3027  *
3028  * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
3029  *
3030  * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
3031  * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
3032  * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
3033  * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
3034  * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
3035  * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
3036  * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
3037  * it finds traffic directed to it.
3038  *
3039  * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
3040  * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
3041  * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
3042  * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
3043  * back to sleep at appropriate times.
3044  *
3045  * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
3046  * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
3047  * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
3048  *
3049  * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
3050  * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
3051  * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
3052  * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
3053  * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
3054  * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
3055  * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
3056  *
3057  * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
3058  * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
3059  * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
3060  * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
3061  * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
3062  * periods.
3063  *
3064  * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
3065  * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
3066  * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
3067  * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
3068  * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
3069  * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
3070  * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
3071  * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
3072  * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
3073  * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
3074  *
3075  * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
3076  * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
3077  * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
3078  * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
3079  * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
3080  * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
3081  *
3082  * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
3083  * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
3084  */
3085 
3086 /**
3087  * DOC: Beacon filter support
3088  *
3089  * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
3090  * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
3091  * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
3092  * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
3093  * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
3094  * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
3095  * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
3096  *
3097  * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
3098  * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
3099  * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
3100  * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
3101  * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
3102  *
3103  * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
3104  * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
3105  * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
3106  * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
3107  *
3108  * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
3109  * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
3110  * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
3111  * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
3112  *
3113  *  - a list of information element IDs
3114  *  - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
3115  *
3116  * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
3117  * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
3118  * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
3119  * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
3120  * vendor information elements.
3121  *
3122  * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
3123  * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
3124  *
3125  * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
3126  * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
3127  * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
3128  * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
3129  * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
3130  * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
3131  *
3132  *
3133  * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
3134  * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
3135  * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
3136  * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
3137  * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
3138  * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
3139  * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
3140  * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
3141  *
3142  * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
3143  * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
3144  * signal strength threshold checking.
3145  */
3146 
3147 /**
3148  * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
3149  *
3150  * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
3151  * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
3152  * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
3153  * "11.2.3 SM power save".
3154  *
3155  * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
3156  * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
3157  * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
3158  * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
3159  * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
3160  * hardware flags.
3161  *
3162  * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
3163  * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
3164  * turned off otherwise.
3165  *
3166  * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
3167  * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
3168  * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
3169  * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
3170  */
3171 
3172 /**
3173  * DOC: Frame filtering
3174  *
3175  * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
3176  * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
3177  * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
3178  * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
3179  * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
3180  *
3181  * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
3182  * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
3183  * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
3184  *
3185  * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
3186  * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
3187  * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
3188  * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
3189  * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
3190  * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
3191  * @total_flags with the new flag states.
3192  *
3193  * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
3194  * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
3195  * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
3196  * or dropped.
3197  *
3198  * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
3199  * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
3200  * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
3201  * the flag, but not clear it.
3202  * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
3203  * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
3204  * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
3205  * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
3206  * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
3207  * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
3208  * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
3209  * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
3210  */
3211 
3212 /**
3213  * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
3214  *
3215  * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
3216  * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
3217  * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
3218  *
3219  * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
3220  * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
3221  * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
3222  * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
3223  * the driver code.
3224  *
3225  * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
3226  * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
3227  * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
3228  * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
3229  * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
3230  * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
3231  * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
3232  *
3233  * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
3234  * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
3235  * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
3236  * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
3237  * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
3238  * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
3239  * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
3240  * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
3241  * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
3242  * @sta_notify callback.
3243  *
3244  * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
3245  * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
3246  * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
3247  * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
3248  * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
3249  * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
3250  * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
3251  * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
3252  * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
3253  * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
3254  * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
3255  * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
3256  * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
3257  * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
3258  *
3259  * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
3260  * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
3261  *
3262  * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
3263  * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
3264  * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
3265  * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
3266  * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
3267  * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
3268  * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
3269  * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
3270  * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
3271  * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
3272  * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
3273  *
3274  * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
3275  * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
3276  * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
3277  * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
3278  * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
3279  * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
3280  * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
3281  * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
3282  * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
3283  * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
3284  * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
3285  * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
3286  * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
3287  * buffers for those TIDs contain.
3288  *
3289  * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
3290  * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
3291  * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
3292  * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
3293  * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
3294  * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
3295  * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
3296  *
3297  * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
3298  * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
3299  * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
3300  * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
3301  * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
3302  *
3303  * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
3304  * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
3305  * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
3306  * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
3307  */
3308 
3309 /**
3310  * DOC: HW queue control
3311  *
3312  * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
3313  * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
3314  * was problematic for a few reasons:
3315  * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
3316  * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
3317  * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
3318  *
3319  * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
3320  * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
3321  * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
3322  *
3323  * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
3324  * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
3325  * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
3326  * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
3327  * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
3328  * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
3329  * the hardware queue.
3330  * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
3331  * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
3332  *
3333  * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
3334  * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
3335  * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
3336  * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
3337  * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
3338  *
3339  * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
3340  * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
3341  * after-DTIM queue for AP:   8
3342  * off-channel queue:         9
3343  *
3344  * It would then set up the hardware like this:
3345  *   hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
3346  *
3347  * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
3348  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
3349  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
3350  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
3351  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
3352  *   vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3353  * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
3354  *
3355  * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
3356  * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
3357  *
3358  * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3359  * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
3360  * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
3361  * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
3362  */
3363 
3364 /**
3365  * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
3366  *
3367  * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
3368  * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
3369  * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
3370  * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
3371  *
3372  * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
3373  *	by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
3374  *	multicast address.
3375  *
3376  * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
3377  *	%RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
3378  *
3379  * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
3380  *	the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
3381  *
3382  * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
3383  *	to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
3384  *	by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
3385  *	mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
3386  *	honour this flag if possible.
3387  *
3388  * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
3389  *	station
3390  *
3391  * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
3392  *
3393  * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames
3394  *
3395  * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
3396  *
3397  * @FIF_MCAST_ACTION: pass multicast Action frames
3398  */
3399 enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
3400 	FIF_ALLMULTI		= 1<<1,
3401 	FIF_FCSFAIL		= 1<<2,
3402 	FIF_PLCPFAIL		= 1<<3,
3403 	FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC	= 1<<4,
3404 	FIF_CONTROL		= 1<<5,
3405 	FIF_OTHER_BSS		= 1<<6,
3406 	FIF_PSPOLL		= 1<<7,
3407 	FIF_PROBE_REQ		= 1<<8,
3408 	FIF_MCAST_ACTION	= 1<<9,
3409 };
3410 
3411 /**
3412  * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
3413  *
3414  * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
3415  * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
3416  *
3417  * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
3418  * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
3419  * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
3420  * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
3421  *
3422  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
3423  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
3424  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation, the driver must either
3425  *	call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() or
3426  *	call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() with status
3427  *	%IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA to delay addba after
3428  *	ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe is called, or just return the special
3429  *	status %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE.
3430  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
3431  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
3432  *	queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
3433  *	driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
3434  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
3435  *	called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
3436  *	ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
3437  *	session is gone and removes the station.
3438  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
3439  *	but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
3440  *	now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
3441  *	should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
3442  */
3443 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
3444 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
3445 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
3446 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
3447 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
3448 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
3449 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
3450 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
3451 };
3452 
3453 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE 1
3454 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA 2
3455 
3456 /**
3457  * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters
3458  *
3459  * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3460  * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session
3461  * @tid: tid of the BA session
3462  * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When
3463  *	action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the
3464  *	actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here.
3465  * @buf_size: reorder buffer size  (number of subframes). Valid only when the
3466  *	action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or
3467  *	%IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3468  * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU.
3469  *	valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3470  * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to
3471  *	%IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START
3472  */
3473 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params {
3474 	enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action;
3475 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
3476 	u16 tid;
3477 	u16 ssn;
3478 	u16 buf_size;
3479 	bool amsdu;
3480 	u16 timeout;
3481 };
3482 
3483 /**
3484  * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
3485  * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
3486  * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
3487  *	frame received on trigger-enabled AC
3488  */
3489 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
3490 	IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
3491 	IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
3492 };
3493 
3494 /**
3495  * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
3496  *
3497  * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
3498  *	to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
3499  *	information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
3500  *	flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
3501  * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
3502  * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
3503  *	changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
3504  *	the peer.
3505  * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
3506  *	by the peer
3507  */
3508 enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
3509 	IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED		= BIT(0),
3510 	IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED	= BIT(1),
3511 	IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED	= BIT(2),
3512 	IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED	= BIT(3),
3513 };
3514 
3515 /**
3516  * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
3517  *
3518  * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
3519  * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
3520  * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vice versa).
3521  * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
3522  * operations compared to other operations/flows.
3523  *
3524  * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
3525  * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
3526  *	for sending management frames offchannel.
3527  */
3528 enum ieee80211_roc_type {
3529 	IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
3530 	IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
3531 };
3532 
3533 /**
3534  * enum ieee80211_reconfig_type - reconfig type
3535  *
3536  * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
3537  * reconfiguration type was completed.
3538  *
3539  * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
3540  *	(also due to resume() callback returning 1)
3541  * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
3542  *	of wowlan configuration)
3543  */
3544 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
3545 	IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
3546 	IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
3547 };
3548 
3549 /**
3550  * struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info - prepare TX information
3551  * @duration: if non-zero, hint about the required duration,
3552  *	only used with the mgd_prepare_tx() method.
3553  * @subtype: frame subtype (auth, (re)assoc, deauth, disassoc)
3554  * @success: whether the frame exchange was successful, only
3555  *	used with the mgd_complete_tx() method, and then only
3556  *	valid for auth and (re)assoc.
3557  */
3558 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info {
3559 	u16 duration;
3560 	u16 subtype;
3561 	u8 success:1;
3562 };
3563 
3564 /**
3565  * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
3566  *
3567  * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
3568  * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
3569  * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
3570  *
3571  * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
3572  *	skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
3573  *	The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
3574  *	configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
3575  *	preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
3576  *	Must be atomic.
3577  *
3578  * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
3579  *	is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
3580  *	frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
3581  *	Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
3582  *	or zero.
3583  *	When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
3584  *	to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
3585  *	is added.
3586  *	Must be implemented and can sleep.
3587  *
3588  * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
3589  *	is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
3590  *	it must turn off frame reception.)
3591  *	May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
3592  *	an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
3593  *	you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
3594  *	Must be implemented and can sleep.
3595  *
3596  * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
3597  *	stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
3598  *	ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
3599  *	configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
3600  *	reconfigured at resume time.
3601  *	The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
3602  *	wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
3603  *	supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
3604  *	must return 1 from this function.
3605  *
3606  * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
3607  *	now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
3608  *	functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
3609  *	to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
3610  *	will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
3611  *
3612  * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
3613  *	modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
3614  *	supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
3615  *	in suspend().
3616  *
3617  * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
3618  *	enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
3619  *	and @stop must be implemented.
3620  *	The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
3621  *	the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
3622  *	interface is given in the conf parameter.
3623  *	The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
3624  *	negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
3625  *	Must be implemented and can sleep.
3626  *
3627  * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
3628  *	is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
3629  *	switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
3630  *	Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
3631  *	found by the interface iteration callbacks.
3632  *
3633  * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
3634  *	The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
3635  *	and no monitor interfaces are present.
3636  *	When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
3637  *	must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
3638  *	the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
3639  *	MAC address of the device going away.
3640  *	Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
3641  *
3642  * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
3643  *	function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
3644  *	This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
3645  *	if it does. The callback can sleep.
3646  *
3647  * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
3648  *	parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
3649  *	level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
3650  *	This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
3651  *	for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
3652  *	of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
3653  *	can sleep.
3654  *	Note: this callback is called if @vif_cfg_changed or @link_info_changed
3655  *	are not implemented.
3656  *
3657  * @vif_cfg_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to interface
3658  *	(MLD) parameters from &struct ieee80211_vif_cfg that vary during the
3659  *	lifetime of the interface (e.g. assoc status, IP addresses, etc.)
3660  *	The @changed parameter indicates which value changed.
3661  *	The callback can sleep.
3662  *
3663  * @link_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to link
3664  *	parameters from &struct ieee80211_bss_conf that are related to an
3665  *	individual link. e.g. legacy/HT/VHT/... rate information.
3666  *	The @changed parameter indicates which value changed, and the @link_id
3667  *	parameter indicates the link ID. Note that the @link_id will be 0 for
3668  *	non-MLO connections.
3669  *	The callback can sleep.
3670  *
3671  * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
3672  *	This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
3673  *	to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
3674  *
3675  * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
3676  *	See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
3677  *	This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
3678  *
3679  * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter.
3680  *	This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames
3681  *	should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination
3682  *	of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates
3683  *	which flags are changed.
3684  *	This callback can sleep.
3685  *
3686  * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
3687  * 	must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
3688  *
3689  * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3690  *	This callback is only called between add_interface and
3691  *	remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
3692  *	is enabled.
3693  *	Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
3694  *	The callback can sleep.
3695  *
3696  * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3697  * 	This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
3698  * 	which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
3699  *	The callback must be atomic.
3700  *
3701  * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
3702  *	host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
3703  *	necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
3704  *	After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
3705  *	userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
3706  *
3707  * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
3708  *	WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
3709  *	offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
3710  *
3711  * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
3712  *	the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
3713  *	configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
3714  *	registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
3715  *	that power save is disabled.
3716  *	The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
3717  *	entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
3718  *	at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
3719  *	(extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
3720  *	When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
3721  *	note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
3722  *	any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
3723  *	This callback is also allowed to return the special return value 1,
3724  *	this indicates that hardware scan isn't desirable right now and a
3725  *	software scan should be done instead. A driver wishing to use this
3726  *	capability must ensure its (hardware) scan capabilities aren't
3727  *	advertised as more capable than mac80211's software scan is.
3728  *	The callback can sleep.
3729  *
3730  * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
3731  *	The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
3732  *	but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
3733  *	ieee80211_scan_completed().
3734  *	This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
3735  *	scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
3736  *	The callback can sleep.
3737  *
3738  * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
3739  *	specific intervals.  The driver must call the
3740  *	ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
3741  *	This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
3742  *
3743  * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
3744  *	In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
3745  *
3746  * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
3747  *	is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
3748  *	The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
3749  *	the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
3750  *	can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
3751  *
3752  * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
3753  *	software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
3754  *	this notification.
3755  *	The callback can sleep.
3756  *
3757  * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
3758  * 	Returns zero if statistics are available.
3759  *	The callback can sleep.
3760  *
3761  * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does
3762  *	IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the
3763  *	IV/PN for the given key from hardware.
3764  *	The callback must be atomic.
3765  *
3766  * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
3767  *	if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the
3768  *	stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG
3769  *	should be set as well.
3770  *	The callback can sleep.
3771  *
3772  * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
3773  *	The callback can sleep.
3774  *
3775  * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
3776  *	AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
3777  *
3778  * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
3779  *	station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
3780  *	returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
3781  *	no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
3782  *	the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3783  *	This callback can sleep.
3784  *
3785  * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
3786  *	when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
3787  *	should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This
3788  *	callback can sleep.
3789  *
3790  * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
3791  *	associated station, AP,  IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
3792  *	in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
3793  *	%IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
3794  *
3795  * @sta_set_txpwr: Configure the station tx power. This callback set the tx
3796  *	power for the station.
3797  *	This callback can sleep.
3798  *
3799  * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
3800  *	station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
3801  *	This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
3802  *	It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
3803  *	up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
3804  *	isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
3805  *	period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
3806  *	See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3807  *	The callback can sleep.
3808  *
3809  * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
3810  *	synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
3811  *	pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
3812  *	the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
3813  *	in @sta_state.
3814  *	The callback can sleep.
3815  *
3816  * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
3817  *	used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
3818  *	from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
3819  *	in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
3820  *	uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
3821  *	otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
3822  *	Must be atomic.
3823  * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
3824  *	is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
3825  *	the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
3826  *
3827  * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
3828  *	filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
3829  *	let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
3830  *	the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
3831  *	all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
3832  *	Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
3833  *	The callback can sleep.
3834  *
3835  * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
3836  *	bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
3837  *	Returns a negative error code on failure.
3838  *	The callback can sleep.
3839  *
3840  * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
3841  *	this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
3842  *	required function.
3843  *	The callback can sleep.
3844  *
3845  * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
3846  *	Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
3847  *	required function.
3848  *	The callback can sleep.
3849  *
3850  * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the
3851  *	firmware/hardware.  Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between
3852  *	calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up
3853  *	as TSF delay. Is not a required function.
3854  *	The callback can sleep.
3855  *
3856  * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
3857  *	with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
3858  *	function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
3859  *	TSF synchronization.
3860  *	The callback can sleep.
3861  *
3862  * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
3863  *	This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
3864  *	used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
3865  *	Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
3866  *	The callback can sleep.
3867  *
3868  * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
3869  *
3870  * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
3871  *	need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
3872  *	and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
3873  *	The callback can sleep.
3874  *
3875  * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
3876  *	in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
3877  *	accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
3878  *	estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
3879  *	coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
3880  *
3881  * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
3882  *	be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
3883  * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
3884  *
3885  * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
3886  *	that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
3887  *	of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
3888  *	use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
3889  *	If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
3890  *	Note that vif can be NULL.
3891  *	The callback can sleep.
3892  *
3893  * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
3894  *	switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
3895  *	callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
3896  *	completion of the channel switch.
3897  *
3898  * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
3899  *	Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
3900  *	reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
3901  *	(also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
3902  *
3903  * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
3904  *
3905  * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
3906  *	call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
3907  *	that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
3908  *	offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
3909  *	normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
3910  *	duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
3911  *	ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
3912  *	Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
3913  *	must be accepted in this case.
3914  *	This callback may sleep.
3915  * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
3916  *	aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
3917  *
3918  * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
3919  *
3920  * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
3921  *
3922  * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
3923  *	queues before entering power save.
3924  *
3925  * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
3926  *	when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
3927  *	The callback can sleep.
3928  * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
3929  *	&enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
3930  *	The callback must be atomic.
3931  *
3932  * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
3933  *	parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
3934  *	sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
3935  *	to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
3936  *	Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
3937  *	if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
3938  *	the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
3939  *	the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
3940  *	more-data bit must always be set.
3941  *	The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
3942  *	from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
3943  *	In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
3944  *	@num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
3945  *	this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3946  *	on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
3947  *	period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
3948  *	responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
3949  *	In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
3950  *	bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
3951  *	at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
3952  *	setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
3953  *	service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
3954  *	on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
3955  *	ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
3956  *	This callback must be atomic.
3957  * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
3958  *	to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
3959  *	via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
3960  *	released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
3961  *	and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
3962  *	frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
3963  *	them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3964  *	on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
3965  *	bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
3966  *	ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
3967  *	The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
3968  *	frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
3969  *	This callback must be atomic.
3970  *
3971  * @get_et_sset_count:  Ethtool API to get string-set count.
3972  *
3973  * @get_et_stats:  Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
3974  *
3975  * @get_et_strings:  Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
3976  *	and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
3977  *
3978  * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
3979  *	before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
3980  *	bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
3981  *	yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
3982  *	transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
3983  *	powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
3984  *	management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
3985  *	driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
3986  *	and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
3987  *	For drivers that set %IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, mac80211
3988  *	would also call this function before transmitting a deauthentication
3989  *	frame in case that no beacon was heard from the AP/P2P GO.
3990  *	The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
3991  *	mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
3992  *	Additional information is passed in the &struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info
3993  *	data. If duration there is greater than zero, mac80211 hints to the
3994  *	driver the duration for which the operation is requested.
3995  *	The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
3996  * @mgd_complete_tx: Notify the driver that the response frame for a previously
3997  *	transmitted frame announced with @mgd_prepare_tx was received, the data
3998  *	is filled similarly to @mgd_prepare_tx though the duration is not used.
3999  *
4000  * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
4001  *	a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
4002  *	channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
4003  *	setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
4004  *	mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
4005  *	discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
4006  *	2 * (DTIM period).
4007  *	The callback is optional and can sleep.
4008  *
4009  * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
4010  *	This callback may sleep.
4011  * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
4012  *	This callback may sleep.
4013  * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
4014  *	may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
4015  *	channel context with different settings
4016  *	This callback may sleep.
4017  * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
4018  *	to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
4019  *	This callback may sleep.
4020  * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
4021  *	unbound from vif.
4022  *	This callback may sleep.
4023  * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
4024  *	another, as specified in the list of
4025  *	@ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
4026  *	to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
4027  *	This callback may sleep.
4028  *
4029  * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
4030  *	information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
4031  *	context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
4032  *	software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
4033  *	just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
4034  *	disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
4035  * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
4036  *
4037  * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
4038  *	during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
4039  *	This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
4040  *	indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
4041  *	This callback may sleep.
4042  *
4043  * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
4044  *	Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
4045  *	This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
4046  *
4047  * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
4048  *	Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
4049  *	function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
4050  *	decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
4051  *	ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
4052  *	get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
4053  *	1 using ieee80211_beacon_counter_is_complete() after the beacon has been
4054  *	transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
4055  *	If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
4056  *	since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
4057  * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
4058  *	before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
4059  *	gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
4060  *	the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
4061  * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
4062  *	after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
4063  *	driver to go back to a normal configuration.
4064  * @abort_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
4065  *	when channel switch procedure was completed, allowing the
4066  *	driver to go back to a normal configuration.
4067  * @channel_switch_rx_beacon: This is an optional callback that is called
4068  *	when channel switch procedure is in progress and additional beacon with
4069  *	CSA IE was received, allowing driver to track changes in count.
4070  * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
4071  *	information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
4072  *	channel context is bound before this is called.
4073  * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
4074  *
4075  * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
4076  *	specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
4077  *	if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
4078  *
4079  * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
4080  *	and hardware limits.
4081  *
4082  * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
4083  *	is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
4084  *	and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
4085  *	driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
4086  *	the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
4087  *	The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
4088  *	optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
4089  * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
4090  *	peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
4091  * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
4092  *	response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
4093  *	parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
4094  *	an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
4095  *	response template is provided, together with the location of the
4096  *	switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
4097  *	the function call.
4098  *
4099  * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
4100  * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a
4101  *	synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues
4102  *	pending frames that were received prior to the control path action
4103  *	currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet.
4104  *
4105  * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one.
4106  * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster.
4107  * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf
4108  *	contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters
4109  *	are changed with respect to the last NAN config.
4110  *	The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since
4111  *	some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the
4112  *	changed parameters.
4113  * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in
4114  *	cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of
4115  *	this call.
4116  * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call
4117  *	ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with
4118  *	NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal.
4119  * @can_aggregate_in_amsdu: Called in order to determine if HW supports
4120  *	aggregating two specific frames in the same A-MSDU. The relation
4121  *	between the skbs should be symmetric and transitive. Note that while
4122  *	skb is always a real frame, head may or may not be an A-MSDU.
4123  * @get_ftm_responder_stats: Retrieve FTM responder statistics, if available.
4124  *	Statistics should be cumulative, currently no way to reset is provided.
4125  *
4126  * @start_pmsr: start peer measurement (e.g. FTM) (this call can sleep)
4127  * @abort_pmsr: abort peer measurement (this call can sleep)
4128  * @set_tid_config: Apply TID specific configurations. This callback may sleep.
4129  * @reset_tid_config: Reset TID specific configuration for the peer.
4130  *	This callback may sleep.
4131  * @update_vif_offload: Update virtual interface offload flags
4132  *	This callback may sleep.
4133  * @sta_set_4addr: Called to notify the driver when a station starts/stops using
4134  *	4-address mode
4135  * @set_sar_specs: Update the SAR (TX power) settings.
4136  * @sta_set_decap_offload: Called to notify the driver when a station is allowed
4137  *	to use rx decapsulation offload
4138  * @add_twt_setup: Update hw with TWT agreement parameters received from the peer.
4139  *	This callback allows the hw to check if requested parameters
4140  *	are supported and if there is enough room for a new agreement.
4141  *	The hw is expected to set agreement result in the req_type field of
4142  *	twt structure.
4143  * @twt_teardown_request: Update the hw with TWT teardown request received
4144  *	from the peer.
4145  * @set_radar_background: Configure dedicated offchannel chain available for
4146  *	radar/CAC detection on some hw. This chain can't be used to transmit
4147  *	or receive frames and it is bounded to a running wdev.
4148  *	Background radar/CAC detection allows to avoid the CAC downtime
4149  *	switching to a different channel during CAC detection on the selected
4150  *	radar channel.
4151  *	The caller is expected to set chandef pointer to NULL in order to
4152  *	disable background CAC/radar detection.
4153  * @net_fill_forward_path: Called from .ndo_fill_forward_path in order to
4154  *	resolve a path for hardware flow offloading
4155  * @change_vif_links: Change the valid links on an interface, note that while
4156  *	removing the old link information is still valid (link_conf pointer),
4157  *	but may immediately disappear after the function returns. The old or
4158  *	new links bitmaps may be 0 if going from/to a non-MLO situation.
4159  *	The @old array contains pointers to the old bss_conf structures
4160  *	that were already removed, in case they're needed.
4161  *	This callback can sleep.
4162  * @change_sta_links: Change the valid links of a station, similar to
4163  *	@change_vif_links. This callback can sleep.
4164  *	Note that a sta can also be inserted or removed with valid links,
4165  *	i.e. passed to @sta_add/@sta_state with sta->valid_links not zero.
4166  *	In fact, cannot change from having valid_links and not having them.
4167  */
4168 struct ieee80211_ops {
4169 	void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4170 		   struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
4171 		   struct sk_buff *skb);
4172 	int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4173 	void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4174 #ifdef CONFIG_PM
4175 	int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
4176 	int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4177 	void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
4178 #endif
4179 	int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4180 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4181 	int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4182 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4183 				enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
4184 	void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4185 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4186 	int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
4187 	void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4188 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4189 				 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
4190 				 u64 changed);
4191 	void (*vif_cfg_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4192 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4193 				u64 changed);
4194 	void (*link_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4195 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4196 				  struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
4197 				  u64 changed);
4198 
4199 	int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4200 			struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf);
4201 	void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4202 			struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf);
4203 
4204 	u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4205 				 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
4206 	void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4207 				 unsigned int changed_flags,
4208 				 unsigned int *total_flags,
4209 				 u64 multicast);
4210 	void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4211 				    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4212 				    unsigned int filter_flags,
4213 				    unsigned int changed_flags);
4214 	int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4215 		       bool set);
4216 	int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
4217 		       struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4218 		       struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
4219 	void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4220 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4221 				struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
4222 				struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4223 				u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
4224 	void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4225 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4226 			       struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
4227 	void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4228 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
4229 	int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4230 		       struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
4231 	void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4232 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4233 	int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4234 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4235 				struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
4236 				struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
4237 	int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4238 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4239 	void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4240 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4241 			      const u8 *mac_addr);
4242 	void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4243 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4244 	int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4245 			 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
4246 	void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4247 			    struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
4248 			    struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4249 	int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
4250 	int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
4251 	int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4252 		       struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4253 	int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4254 			  struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4255 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
4256 	void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4257 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4258 				struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4259 				struct dentry *dir);
4260 #endif
4261 	void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4262 			enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4263 	int (*sta_set_txpwr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4264 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4265 			     struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4266 	int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4267 			 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4268 			 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
4269 			 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
4270 	void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4271 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4272 				   struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4273 	void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4274 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4275 			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4276 			      u32 changed);
4277 	void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4278 				    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4279 				    struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4280 	void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4281 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4282 			       struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4283 			       struct station_info *sinfo);
4284 	int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4285 		       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4286 		       unsigned int link_id, u16 ac,
4287 		       const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
4288 	u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4289 	void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4290 			u64 tsf);
4291 	void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4292 			   s64 offset);
4293 	void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4294 	int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4295 
4296 	/**
4297 	 * @ampdu_action:
4298 	 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action.
4299 	 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
4300 	 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
4301 	 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
4302 	 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver
4303 	 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size
4304 	 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
4305 	 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
4306 	 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
4307 	 *
4308 	 * - ``TX: 1.....7``
4309 	 * - ``RX:  2....7`` (lost frame #1)
4310 	 * - ``TX:        8..1...``
4311 	 *
4312 	 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
4313 	 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
4314 	 *
4315 	 * - ``TX:        1   or``
4316 	 * - ``TX:        18  or``
4317 	 * - ``TX:        81``
4318 	 *
4319 	 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
4320 	 *
4321 	 * Returns a negative error code on failure. The driver may return
4322 	 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE for %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START
4323 	 * if the session can start immediately.
4324 	 *
4325 	 * The callback can sleep.
4326 	 */
4327 	int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4328 			    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4329 			    struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params);
4330 	int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
4331 		struct survey_info *survey);
4332 	void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4333 	void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
4334 #ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
4335 	int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4336 			    void *data, int len);
4337 	int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
4338 			     struct netlink_callback *cb,
4339 			     void *data, int len);
4340 #endif
4341 	void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4342 		      u32 queues, bool drop);
4343 	void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4344 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4345 			       struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4346 	int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
4347 	int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
4348 
4349 	int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4350 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4351 				 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
4352 				 int duration,
4353 				 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
4354 	int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4355 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4356 	int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
4357 	void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4358 			      u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
4359 	bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4360 	int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4361 				const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
4362 	void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4363 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4364 			       const struct ieee80211_event *event);
4365 
4366 	void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4367 				      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4368 				      u16 tids, int num_frames,
4369 				      enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
4370 				      bool more_data);
4371 	void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4372 					struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4373 					u16 tids, int num_frames,
4374 					enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
4375 					bool more_data);
4376 
4377 	int	(*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4378 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
4379 	void	(*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4380 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4381 				struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
4382 	void	(*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4383 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4384 				  u32 sset, u8 *data);
4385 
4386 	void	(*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4387 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4388 				  struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info *info);
4389 	void	(*mgd_complete_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4390 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4391 				   struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info *info);
4392 
4393 	void	(*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4394 					     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4395 
4396 	int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4397 			   struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4398 	void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4399 			       struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4400 	void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4401 			       struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
4402 			       u32 changed);
4403 	int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4404 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4405 				  struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf,
4406 				  struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4407 	void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4408 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4409 				     struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf,
4410 				     struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4411 	int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4412 				  struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
4413 				  int n_vifs,
4414 				  enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
4415 
4416 	void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4417 				  enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
4418 
4419 #if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
4420 	void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4421 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4422 				 struct inet6_dev *idev);
4423 #endif
4424 	void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4425 				      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4426 				      struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
4427 	int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4428 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4429 				  struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4430 
4431 	int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4432 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4433 	void (*abort_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4434 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4435 	void (*channel_switch_rx_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4436 					 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4437 					 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4438 
4439 	int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4440 	void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4441 	u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4442 				       struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4443 	int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4444 			   int *dbm);
4445 
4446 	int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4447 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4448 				   struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
4449 				   struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
4450 				   struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
4451 	void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4452 					   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4453 					   struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4454 	void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4455 					 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4456 					 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
4457 
4458 	void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4459 			      struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
4460 	void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4461 
4462 	int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4463 			 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4464 			 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf);
4465 	int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4466 			struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4467 	int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4468 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4469 			       struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes);
4470 	int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4471 			    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4472 			    const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func);
4473 	void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4474 			    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4475 			    u8 instance_id);
4476 	bool (*can_aggregate_in_amsdu)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4477 				       struct sk_buff *head,
4478 				       struct sk_buff *skb);
4479 	int (*get_ftm_responder_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4480 				       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4481 				       struct cfg80211_ftm_responder_stats *ftm_stats);
4482 	int (*start_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4483 			  struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4484 	void (*abort_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4485 			   struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4486 	int (*set_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4487 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4488 			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4489 			      struct cfg80211_tid_config *tid_conf);
4490 	int (*reset_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4491 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4492 				struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tids);
4493 	void (*update_vif_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4494 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4495 	void (*sta_set_4addr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4496 			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled);
4497 	int (*set_sar_specs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4498 			     const struct cfg80211_sar_specs *sar);
4499 	void (*sta_set_decap_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4500 				      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4501 				      struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled);
4502 	void (*add_twt_setup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4503 			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4504 			      struct ieee80211_twt_setup *twt);
4505 	void (*twt_teardown_request)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4506 				     struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 flowid);
4507 	int (*set_radar_background)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4508 				    struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
4509 	int (*net_fill_forward_path)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4510 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4511 				     struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4512 				     struct net_device_path_ctx *ctx,
4513 				     struct net_device_path *path);
4514 	int (*change_vif_links)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4515 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4516 				u16 old_links, u16 new_links,
4517 				struct ieee80211_bss_conf *old[IEEE80211_MLD_MAX_NUM_LINKS]);
4518 	int (*change_sta_links)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4519 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4520 				struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4521 				u16 old_links, u16 new_links);
4522 };
4523 
4524 /**
4525  * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
4526  *
4527  * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4528  * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4529  * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4530  * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4531  * @priv_data_len.
4532  *
4533  * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4534  * @ops: callbacks for this device
4535  * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
4536  *	NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
4537  *
4538  * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4539  */
4540 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
4541 					   const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
4542 					   const char *requested_name);
4543 
4544 /**
4545  * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
4546  *
4547  * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4548  * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4549  * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4550  * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4551  * @priv_data_len.
4552  *
4553  * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4554  * @ops: callbacks for this device
4555  *
4556  * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4557  */
4558 static inline
ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,const struct ieee80211_ops * ops)4559 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
4560 					const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
4561 {
4562 	return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
4563 }
4564 
4565 /**
4566  * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
4567  *
4568  * You must call this function before any other functions in
4569  * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
4570  * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
4571  *
4572  * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4573  *
4574  * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
4575  */
4576 int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4577 
4578 /**
4579  * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
4580  * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
4581  * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
4582  *	(full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
4583  */
4584 struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
4585 	int throughput;
4586 	int blink_time;
4587 };
4588 
4589 /**
4590  * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
4591  * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
4592  * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
4593  * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
4594  *	interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
4595  */
4596 enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
4597 	IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO		= BIT(0),
4598 	IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK		= BIT(1),
4599 	IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED	= BIT(2),
4600 };
4601 
4602 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4603 const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4604 const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4605 const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4606 const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4607 const char *
4608 __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4609 				   unsigned int flags,
4610 				   const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4611 				   unsigned int blink_table_len);
4612 #endif
4613 /**
4614  * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
4615  *
4616  * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4617  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4618  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4619  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4620  *
4621  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4622  *
4623  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4624  */
ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw * hw)4625 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4626 {
4627 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4628 	return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
4629 #else
4630 	return NULL;
4631 #endif
4632 }
4633 
4634 /**
4635  * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
4636  *
4637  * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4638  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4639  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4640  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4641  *
4642  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4643  *
4644  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4645  */
ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw * hw)4646 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4647 {
4648 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4649 	return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
4650 #else
4651 	return NULL;
4652 #endif
4653 }
4654 
4655 /**
4656  * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
4657  *
4658  * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4659  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4660  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4661  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4662  *
4663  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4664  *
4665  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4666  */
ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw * hw)4667 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4668 {
4669 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4670 	return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
4671 #else
4672 	return NULL;
4673 #endif
4674 }
4675 
4676 /**
4677  * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
4678  *
4679  * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4680  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4681  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4682  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4683  *
4684  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4685  *
4686  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4687  */
ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw * hw)4688 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4689 {
4690 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4691 	return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
4692 #else
4693 	return NULL;
4694 #endif
4695 }
4696 
4697 /**
4698  * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
4699  * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
4700  * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
4701  * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
4702  * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
4703  *
4704  * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
4705  * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
4706  *
4707  * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
4708  */
4709 static inline const char *
ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,unsigned int flags,const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink * blink_table,unsigned int blink_table_len)4710 ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
4711 				 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4712 				 unsigned int blink_table_len)
4713 {
4714 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4715 	return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
4716 						  blink_table_len);
4717 #else
4718 	return NULL;
4719 #endif
4720 }
4721 
4722 /**
4723  * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
4724  *
4725  * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
4726  * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
4727  *
4728  * @hw: the hardware to unregister
4729  */
4730 void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4731 
4732 /**
4733  * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
4734  *
4735  * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
4736  * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
4737  * before calling this function.
4738  *
4739  * @hw: the hardware to free
4740  */
4741 void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4742 
4743 /**
4744  * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
4745  *
4746  * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
4747  * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
4748  * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
4749  * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
4750  * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
4751  * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
4752  *
4753  * @hw: the hardware to restart
4754  */
4755 void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4756 
4757 /**
4758  * ieee80211_rx_list - receive frame and store processed skbs in a list
4759  *
4760  * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4761  * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4762  * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4763  * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4764  * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4765  *
4766  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4767  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4768  * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4769  * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4770  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4771  *
4772  * This function must be called with BHs disabled and RCU read lock
4773  *
4774  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4775  * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
4776  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4777  * @list: the destination list
4778  */
4779 void ieee80211_rx_list(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4780 		       struct sk_buff *skb, struct list_head *list);
4781 
4782 /**
4783  * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context
4784  *
4785  * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4786  * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4787  * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4788  * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4789  * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4790  *
4791  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4792  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4793  * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4794  * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4795  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4796  *
4797  * This function must be called with BHs disabled.
4798  *
4799  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4800  * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
4801  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4802  * @napi: the NAPI context
4803  */
4804 void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4805 		       struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi);
4806 
4807 /**
4808  * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
4809  *
4810  * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4811  * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4812  * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4813  * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4814  * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4815  *
4816  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4817  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4818  * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4819  * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4820  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4821  *
4822  * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
4823  *
4824  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4825  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4826  */
ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct sk_buff * skb)4827 static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb)
4828 {
4829 	ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL);
4830 }
4831 
4832 /**
4833  * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
4834  *
4835  * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
4836  * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4837  *
4838  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
4839  * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
4840  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4841  *
4842  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4843  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4844  */
4845 void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
4846 
4847 /**
4848  * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
4849  *
4850  * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
4851  * (internally disables bottom halves).
4852  *
4853  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
4854  * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4855  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4856  *
4857  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4858  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4859  */
ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct sk_buff * skb)4860 static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4861 				   struct sk_buff *skb)
4862 {
4863 	local_bh_disable();
4864 	ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
4865 	local_bh_enable();
4866 }
4867 
4868 /**
4869  * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
4870  *
4871  * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
4872  * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
4873  * entering/leaving PS mode.
4874  *
4875  * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
4876  *
4877  * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
4878  * each other.
4879  *
4880  * @sta: currently connected sta
4881  * @start: start or stop PS
4882  *
4883  * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
4884  */
4885 int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
4886 
4887 /**
4888  * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
4889  *                                  (in process context)
4890  *
4891  * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
4892  * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
4893  * applies.
4894  *
4895  * @sta: currently connected sta
4896  * @start: start or stop PS
4897  *
4898  * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
4899  */
ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta * sta,bool start)4900 static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4901 						  bool start)
4902 {
4903 	int ret;
4904 
4905 	local_bh_disable();
4906 	ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
4907 	local_bh_enable();
4908 
4909 	return ret;
4910 }
4911 
4912 /**
4913  * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received
4914  * @sta: currently connected station
4915  *
4916  * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4917  * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a
4918  * connected station was received.
4919  * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4920  * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must
4921  * be serialized.
4922  */
4923 void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4924 
4925 /**
4926  * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received
4927  * @sta: currently connected station
4928  * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame
4929  *
4930  * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4931  * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame
4932  * from a connected station was received.
4933  * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4934  * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be
4935  * serialized.
4936  * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown.
4937  * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC
4938  * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper
4939  * checks.
4940  */
4941 void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
4942 
4943 /*
4944  * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
4945  * This is enough for the radiotap header.
4946  */
4947 #define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM	ALIGN(14, 4)
4948 
4949 /**
4950  * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
4951  * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
4952  * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
4953  * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
4954  *
4955  * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
4956  * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
4957  * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
4958  *
4959  * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
4960  * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
4961  * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
4962  * call! Beware of the locking!)
4963  *
4964  * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
4965  * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
4966  * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
4967  * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
4968  * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
4969  * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
4970  *
4971  * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
4972  * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
4973  * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
4974  * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
4975  * use this API.
4976  */
4977 void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4978 				u8 tid, bool buffered);
4979 
4980 /**
4981  * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
4982  *
4983  * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
4984  * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
4985  * rate selection table for the station entry.
4986  *
4987  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4988  * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
4989  * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
4990  * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
4991  * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
4992  */
4993 void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4994 			    struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4995 			    struct sk_buff *skb,
4996 			    struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
4997 			    int max_rates);
4998 
4999 /**
5000  * ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput - set the expected tpt for a station
5001  *
5002  * Call this function to notify mac80211 about a change in expected throughput
5003  * to a station. A driver for a device that does rate control in firmware can
5004  * call this function when the expected throughput estimate towards a station
5005  * changes. The information is used to tune the CoDel AQM applied to traffic
5006  * going towards that station (which can otherwise be too aggressive and cause
5007  * slow stations to starve).
5008  *
5009  * @pubsta: the station to set throughput for.
5010  * @thr: the current expected throughput in kbps.
5011  */
5012 void ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
5013 					   u32 thr);
5014 
5015 /**
5016  * ieee80211_tx_rate_update - transmit rate update callback
5017  *
5018  * Drivers should call this functions with a non-NULL pub sta
5019  * This function can be used in drivers that does not have provision
5020  * in updating the tx rate in data path.
5021  *
5022  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
5023  * @pubsta: the station to update the tx rate for.
5024  * @info: tx status information
5025  */
5026 void ieee80211_tx_rate_update(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5027 			      struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
5028 			      struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
5029 
5030 /**
5031  * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
5032  *
5033  * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
5034  * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
5035  * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
5036  *
5037  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
5038  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
5039  * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
5040  * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
5041  * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
5042  *
5043  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
5044  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
5045  */
5046 void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5047 			 struct sk_buff *skb);
5048 
5049 /**
5050  * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback
5051  *
5052  * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
5053  * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not
5054  * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info.
5055  *
5056  * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
5057  * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
5058  * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
5059  *
5060  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
5061  * @status: tx status information
5062  */
5063 void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5064 			     struct ieee80211_tx_status *status);
5065 
5066 /**
5067  * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
5068  *
5069  * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
5070  * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
5071  * specific skbs.
5072  *
5073  * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
5074  * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
5075  * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
5076  *
5077  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
5078  * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
5079  *	(NULL for multicast packets)
5080  * @info: tx status information
5081  */
ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct ieee80211_sta * sta,struct ieee80211_tx_info * info)5082 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5083 					     struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5084 					     struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
5085 {
5086 	struct ieee80211_tx_status status = {
5087 		.sta = sta,
5088 		.info = info,
5089 	};
5090 
5091 	ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status);
5092 }
5093 
5094 /**
5095  * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
5096  *
5097  * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
5098  *
5099  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
5100  * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
5101  * for a single hardware.
5102  *
5103  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
5104  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
5105  */
ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct sk_buff * skb)5106 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5107 					  struct sk_buff *skb)
5108 {
5109 	local_bh_disable();
5110 	ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
5111 	local_bh_enable();
5112 }
5113 
5114 /**
5115  * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
5116  *
5117  * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
5118  * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
5119  *
5120  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
5121  * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
5122  *
5123  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
5124  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
5125  */
5126 void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5127 				 struct sk_buff *skb);
5128 
5129 /**
5130  * ieee80211_tx_status_8023 - transmit status callback for 802.3 frame format
5131  *
5132  * Call this function for all transmitted data frames after their transmit
5133  * completion. This callback should only be called for data frames which
5134  * are using driver's (or hardware's) offload capability of encap/decap
5135  * 802.11 frames.
5136  *
5137  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
5138  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other and all
5139  * calls in the same tx status family.
5140  *
5141  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
5142  * @vif: the interface for which the frame was transmitted
5143  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
5144  */
5145 void ieee80211_tx_status_8023(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5146 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5147 			       struct sk_buff *skb);
5148 
5149 /**
5150  * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
5151  *
5152  * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
5153  * connected STA.
5154  *
5155  * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
5156  * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
5157  */
5158 void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
5159 
5160 #define IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM 2
5161 
5162 /**
5163  * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
5164  * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
5165  * @tim_length: size of TIM element
5166  * @cntdwn_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
5167  *	to countdown counters.  This array can contain zero values which
5168  *	should be ignored.
5169  * @mbssid_off: position of the multiple bssid element
5170  */
5171 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
5172 	u16 tim_offset;
5173 	u16 tim_length;
5174 
5175 	u16 cntdwn_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM];
5176 	u16 mbssid_off;
5177 };
5178 
5179 /**
5180  * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
5181  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5182  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5183  * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
5184  *	receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
5185  * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for a non-MLD AP)
5186  *
5187  * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
5188  * obtain the beacon template.
5189  *
5190  * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
5191  * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
5192  * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
5193  * applicable, the CSA count.
5194  *
5195  * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
5196  *
5197  * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
5198  */
5199 struct sk_buff *
5200 ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5201 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5202 			      struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs,
5203 			      unsigned int link_id);
5204 
5205 /**
5206  * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
5207  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5208  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5209  * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
5210  *	Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
5211  * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
5212  *	(including the ID and length bytes!).
5213  *	Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
5214  * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for a non-MLD AP)
5215  *
5216  * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
5217  * obtain the beacon frame.
5218  *
5219  * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
5220  * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
5221  * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
5222  * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
5223  *
5224  * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
5225  *
5226  * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
5227  */
5228 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5229 					 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5230 					 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length,
5231 					 unsigned int link_id);
5232 
5233 /**
5234  * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
5235  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5236  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5237  * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for a non-MLD AP)
5238  *
5239  * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
5240  *
5241  * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
5242  */
ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct ieee80211_vif * vif,unsigned int link_id)5243 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5244 						   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5245 						   unsigned int link_id)
5246 {
5247 	return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL, link_id);
5248 }
5249 
5250 /**
5251  * ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn - request mac80211 to decrement the beacon countdown
5252  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5253  *
5254  * The beacon counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
5255  * This function is called implicitly when
5256  * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
5257  * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
5258  * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's beacon countdown.
5259  *
5260  * Return: new countdown value
5261  */
5262 u8 ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5263 
5264 /**
5265  * ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn - request mac80211 to set beacon countdown
5266  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5267  * @counter: the new value for the counter
5268  *
5269  * The beacon countdown can be changed by the device, this API should be
5270  * used by the device driver to update csa counter in mac80211.
5271  *
5272  * It should never be used together with ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(),
5273  * as it will cause a race condition around the counter value.
5274  */
5275 void ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 counter);
5276 
5277 /**
5278  * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
5279  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5280  *
5281  * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
5282  * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
5283  * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
5284  */
5285 void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5286 
5287 /**
5288  * ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete - find out if countdown reached 1
5289  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5290  *
5291  * This function returns whether the countdown reached zero.
5292  */
5293 bool ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5294 
5295 /**
5296  * ieee80211_color_change_finish - notify mac80211 about color change
5297  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5298  *
5299  * After a color change announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
5300  * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
5301  * notify mac80211 that the color can be changed
5302  */
5303 void ieee80211_color_change_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5304 
5305 /**
5306  * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
5307  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5308  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5309  *
5310  * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5311  * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
5312  *
5313  * Can only be called in AP mode.
5314  *
5315  * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
5316  */
5317 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5318 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5319 
5320 /**
5321  * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
5322  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5323  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5324  *
5325  * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
5326  * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
5327  * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
5328  *
5329  * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
5330  * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
5331  *
5332  * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
5333  */
5334 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5335 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5336 
5337 /**
5338  * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
5339  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5340  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5341  * @link_id: If the vif is an MLD, get a frame with the link addresses
5342  *	for the given link ID. For a link_id < 0 you get a frame with
5343  *	MLD addresses, however useful that might be.
5344  * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set
5345  *	if at all possible
5346  *
5347  * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
5348  * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
5349  * BSSID and address is used.
5350  *
5351  * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the
5352  * returned packet will be QoS NDP.
5353  *
5354  * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
5355  * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
5356  *
5357  * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
5358  */
5359 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5360 				       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5361 				       int link_id, bool qos_ok);
5362 
5363 /**
5364  * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5365  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5366  * @src_addr: source MAC address
5367  * @ssid: SSID buffer
5368  * @ssid_len: length of SSID
5369  * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
5370  *
5371  * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5372  * hardware.
5373  *
5374  * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
5375  */
5376 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5377 				       const u8 *src_addr,
5378 				       const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
5379 				       size_t tailroom);
5380 
5381 /**
5382  * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
5383  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5384  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5385  * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
5386  * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
5387  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5388  * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
5389  *
5390  * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
5391  * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5392  * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
5393  * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
5394  */
5395 void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5396 		       const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
5397 		       const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
5398 		       struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
5399 
5400 /**
5401  * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
5402  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5403  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5404  * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
5405  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5406  *
5407  * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
5408  * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5409  * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
5410  *
5411  * Return: The duration.
5412  */
5413 __le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5414 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
5415 			      const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
5416 
5417 /**
5418  * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
5419  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5420  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5421  * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
5422  * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
5423  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5424  * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
5425  *
5426  * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
5427  * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5428  * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
5429  * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
5430  */
5431 void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5432 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5433 			     const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
5434 			     const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
5435 			     struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
5436 
5437 /**
5438  * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
5439  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5440  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5441  * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
5442  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5443  *
5444  * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
5445  * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5446  * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
5447  *
5448  * Return: The duration.
5449  */
5450 __le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5451 				    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5452 				    size_t frame_len,
5453 				    const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
5454 
5455 /**
5456  * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
5457  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5458  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5459  * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
5460  * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
5461  * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
5462  *
5463  * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
5464  * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
5465  *
5466  * Return: The duration.
5467  */
5468 __le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5469 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5470 					enum nl80211_band band,
5471 					size_t frame_len,
5472 					struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
5473 
5474 /**
5475  * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
5476  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5477  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5478  *
5479  * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
5480  * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
5481  * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
5482  * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
5483  * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
5484  *
5485  * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
5486  * frames are available.
5487  *
5488  * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
5489  * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
5490  * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
5491  * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
5492  * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
5493  * use common code for all beacons.
5494  */
5495 struct sk_buff *
5496 ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5497 
5498 /**
5499  * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
5500  *
5501  * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
5502  *
5503  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5504  * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
5505  * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5506  */
5507 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5508 			       u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
5509 
5510 /**
5511  * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
5512  *
5513  * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
5514  * from the given packet.
5515  *
5516  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5517  * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
5518  *	with this P1K
5519  * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5520  */
ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf * keyconf,struct sk_buff * skb,u16 * p1k)5521 static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5522 					  struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
5523 {
5524 	struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
5525 	const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
5526 	u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
5527 
5528 	ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
5529 }
5530 
5531 /**
5532  * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
5533  *
5534  * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
5535  * and transmitter address.
5536  *
5537  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5538  * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
5539  * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
5540  * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5541  */
5542 void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5543 			       const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
5544 
5545 /**
5546  * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
5547  *
5548  * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
5549  * in the packet.
5550  *
5551  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5552  * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
5553  *	encrypted with this key
5554  * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
5555  */
5556 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5557 			    struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
5558 
5559 /**
5560  * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos
5561  *
5562  * @pos: start of crypto header
5563  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5564  * @pn: PN to add
5565  *
5566  * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of
5567  * the packet payload)
5568  *
5569  * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should
5570  * point to the crypto header)
5571  */
5572 u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn);
5573 
5574 /**
5575  * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
5576  *
5577  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5578  * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5579  *	the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5580  *	CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5581  * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
5582  *
5583  * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
5584  * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
5585  * by the device and not by mac80211.
5586  *
5587  * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5588  * can be done concurrently.
5589  */
5590 void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5591 			      int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5592 
5593 /**
5594  * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
5595  *
5596  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5597  * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5598  *	the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5599  *	CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5600  * @seq: new sequence data
5601  *
5602  * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
5603  * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
5604  * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
5605  * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
5606  *
5607  * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5608  * can be done concurrently.
5609  */
5610 void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5611 			      int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5612 
5613 /**
5614  * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
5615  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5616  *
5617  * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
5618  * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
5619  * instead assumed to have been removed already.
5620  *
5621  * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
5622  * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
5623  */
5624 void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5625 
5626 /**
5627  * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
5628  * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
5629  * @keyconf: new key data
5630  *
5631  * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
5632  * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
5633  * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
5634  *
5635  * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
5636  * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
5637  * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
5638  * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
5639  *
5640  * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
5641  * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
5642  * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
5643  * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
5644  * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
5645  * of the reconfiguration.
5646  *
5647  * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
5648  * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
5649  *
5650  * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
5651  * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
5652  * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
5653  * the key that's being replaced.
5654  */
5655 struct ieee80211_key_conf *
5656 ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5657 			struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5658 
5659 /**
5660  * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
5661  * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
5662  * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
5663  * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
5664  * @gfp: allocation flags
5665  */
5666 void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
5667 				const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
5668 
5669 /**
5670  * ieee80211_key_mic_failure - increment MIC failure counter for the key
5671  *
5672  * Note: this is really only safe if no other RX function is called
5673  * at the same time.
5674  *
5675  * @keyconf: the key in question
5676  */
5677 void ieee80211_key_mic_failure(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5678 
5679 /**
5680  * ieee80211_key_replay - increment replay counter for the key
5681  *
5682  * Note: this is really only safe if no other RX function is called
5683  * at the same time.
5684  *
5685  * @keyconf: the key in question
5686  */
5687 void ieee80211_key_replay(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5688 
5689 /**
5690  * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
5691  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5692  * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5693  *
5694  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5695  */
5696 void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5697 
5698 /**
5699  * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
5700  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5701  * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5702  *
5703  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5704  */
5705 void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5706 
5707 /**
5708  * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
5709  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5710  * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5711  *
5712  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5713  *
5714  * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
5715  */
5716 
5717 int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5718 
5719 /**
5720  * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
5721  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5722  *
5723  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5724  */
5725 void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5726 
5727 /**
5728  * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
5729  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5730  *
5731  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5732  */
5733 void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5734 
5735 /**
5736  * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
5737  *
5738  * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
5739  * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
5740  * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
5741  * any context, including hardirq context.
5742  *
5743  * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
5744  * @info: information about the completed scan
5745  */
5746 void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5747 			      struct cfg80211_scan_info *info);
5748 
5749 /**
5750  * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
5751  *
5752  * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
5753  * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
5754  *
5755  * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5756  */
5757 void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5758 
5759 /**
5760  * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
5761  *
5762  * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
5763  * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
5764  * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
5765  * while associating, for instance.
5766  *
5767  * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5768  */
5769 void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5770 
5771 /**
5772  * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
5773  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
5774  *	been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
5775  *	reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
5776  *	interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
5777  *	haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5778  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
5779  *	interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5780  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
5781  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER: Skip any interfaces where SDATA
5782  *	is not in the driver.  This may fix crashes during firmware recovery
5783  *	for instance.
5784  */
5785 enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
5786 	IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL	= 0,
5787 	IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL	= BIT(0),
5788 	IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE	= BIT(1),
5789 	IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER	= BIT(2),
5790 };
5791 
5792 /**
5793  * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
5794  *
5795  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5796  * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
5797  * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
5798  * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5799  *
5800  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5801  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5802  * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5803  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5804  */
5805 void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5806 				  void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5807 						   struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5808 				  void *data);
5809 
5810 /**
5811  * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
5812  *
5813  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5814  * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5815  * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
5816  * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
5817  * be used.
5818  * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5819  *
5820  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5821  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5822  * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5823  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5824  */
5825 static inline void
ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,u32 iter_flags,void (* iterator)(void * data,u8 * mac,struct ieee80211_vif * vif),void * data)5826 ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5827 				    void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5828 						     struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5829 				    void *data)
5830 {
5831 	ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
5832 				     iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
5833 				     iterator, data);
5834 }
5835 
5836 /**
5837  * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
5838  *
5839  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5840  * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5841  * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5842  * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
5843  * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5844  *
5845  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5846  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5847  * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5848  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5849  */
5850 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5851 						u32 iter_flags,
5852 						void (*iterator)(void *data,
5853 						    u8 *mac,
5854 						    struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5855 						void *data);
5856 
5857 /**
5858  * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_mtx - iterate active interfaces
5859  *
5860  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5861  * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5862  * This version can only be used while holding the wiphy mutex.
5863  * The driver must not call this with a lock held that it can also take in
5864  * response to callbacks from mac80211, and it must not call this within
5865  * callbacks made by mac80211 - both would result in deadlocks.
5866  *
5867  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5868  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5869  * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5870  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5871  */
5872 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_mtx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5873 					     u32 iter_flags,
5874 					     void (*iterator)(void *data,
5875 						u8 *mac,
5876 						struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5877 					     void *data);
5878 
5879 /**
5880  * ieee80211_iterate_stations - iterate stations
5881  *
5882  * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
5883  * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
5884  * function for them.
5885  * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
5886  * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic can be used.
5887  *
5888  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5889  * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5890  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5891  */
5892 void ieee80211_iterate_stations(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5893 				void (*iterator)(void *data,
5894 						 struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
5895 				void *data);
5896 
5897 /**
5898  * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
5899  *
5900  * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
5901  * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
5902  * function for them.
5903  * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5904  *
5905  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5906  * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5907  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5908  */
5909 void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5910 				       void (*iterator)(void *data,
5911 						struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
5912 				       void *data);
5913 /**
5914  * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5915  *
5916  * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
5917  * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
5918  *
5919  * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5920  * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
5921  */
5922 void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
5923 
5924 /**
5925  * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5926  *
5927  * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
5928  * workqueue.
5929  *
5930  * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5931  * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
5932  * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
5933  */
5934 void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5935 				  struct delayed_work *dwork,
5936 				  unsigned long delay);
5937 
5938 /**
5939  * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
5940  * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
5941  * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5942  * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
5943  *
5944  * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
5945  *
5946  * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5947  * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5948  * will be managed by the mac80211.
5949  */
5950 int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
5951 				  u16 timeout);
5952 
5953 /**
5954  * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
5955  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5956  * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5957  * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5958  *
5959  * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5960  * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
5961  * from any context.
5962  */
5963 void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5964 				      u16 tid);
5965 
5966 /**
5967  * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
5968  * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
5969  * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
5970  *
5971  * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
5972  *
5973  * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5974  * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5975  * will be managed by the mac80211.
5976  */
5977 int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
5978 
5979 /**
5980  * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
5981  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5982  * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5983  * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
5984  *
5985  * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5986  * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
5987  * can be called from any context.
5988  */
5989 void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5990 				     u16 tid);
5991 
5992 /**
5993  * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
5994  *
5995  * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
5996  * @addr: station's address
5997  *
5998  * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5999  *
6000  * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
6001  * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
6002  */
6003 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6004 					 const u8 *addr);
6005 
6006 /**
6007  * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
6008  *
6009  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6010  * @addr: remote station's address
6011  * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
6012  *
6013  * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
6014  *
6015  * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
6016  * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
6017  *
6018  * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
6019  *      the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
6020  *      We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
6021  *      logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
6022  *      BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
6023  *      In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
6024  *      is not reliable.
6025  *
6026  * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
6027  */
6028 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6029 					       const u8 *addr,
6030 					       const u8 *localaddr);
6031 
6032 /**
6033  * ieee80211_find_sta_by_link_addrs - find STA by link addresses
6034  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6035  * @addr: remote station's link address
6036  * @localaddr: local link address, use %NULL for any (but avoid that)
6037  * @link_id: pointer to obtain the link ID if the STA is found,
6038  *	may be %NULL if the link ID is not needed
6039  *
6040  * Obtain the STA by link address, must use RCU protection.
6041  */
6042 struct ieee80211_sta *
6043 ieee80211_find_sta_by_link_addrs(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6044 				 const u8 *addr,
6045 				 const u8 *localaddr,
6046 				 unsigned int *link_id);
6047 
6048 /**
6049  * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
6050  * @hw: the hardware
6051  * @pubsta: the station
6052  * @block: whether to block or unblock
6053  *
6054  * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
6055  * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
6056  * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
6057  * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
6058  * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
6059  *
6060  * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
6061  * manner.
6062  *
6063  * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
6064  * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
6065  * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
6066  * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
6067  * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
6068  * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
6069  * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
6070  * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
6071  * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
6072  * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
6073  * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
6074  * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
6075  * woke up while blocked or not.
6076  */
6077 void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6078 			       struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
6079 
6080 /**
6081  * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
6082  * @pubsta: the station
6083  *
6084  * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
6085  * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
6086  * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
6087  * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
6088  *
6089  * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
6090  * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
6091  * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
6092  * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
6093  *
6094  * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
6095  *     driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
6096  *     you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
6097  *     and restore the _irqsafe version!
6098  */
6099 void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
6100 
6101 /**
6102  * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP
6103  * @pubsta: the station
6104  * @tid: the tid of the NDP
6105  *
6106  * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close
6107  * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when
6108  * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window.
6109  * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a
6110  * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the
6111  * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to
6112  * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any
6113  * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong.
6114  * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame
6115  * will be sent despite the station being in power-save.
6116  * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames().
6117  * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver
6118  * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call
6119  * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent.
6120  */
6121 void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid);
6122 
6123 /**
6124  * ieee80211_sta_recalc_aggregates - recalculate aggregate data after a change
6125  * @pubsta: the station
6126  *
6127  * Call this function after changing a per-link aggregate data as referenced in
6128  * &struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates by accessing the agg field of
6129  * &struct ieee80211_link_sta.
6130  *
6131  * With non MLO the data in deflink will be referenced directly. In that case
6132  * there is no need to call this function.
6133  */
6134 void ieee80211_sta_recalc_aggregates(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
6135 
6136 /**
6137  * ieee80211_sta_register_airtime - register airtime usage for a sta/tid
6138  *
6139  * Register airtime usage for a given sta on a given tid. The driver must call
6140  * this function to notify mac80211 that a station used a certain amount of
6141  * airtime. This information will be used by the TXQ scheduler to schedule
6142  * stations in a way that ensures airtime fairness.
6143  *
6144  * The reported airtime should as a minimum include all time that is spent
6145  * transmitting to the remote station, including overhead and padding, but not
6146  * including time spent waiting for a TXOP. If the time is not reported by the
6147  * hardware it can in some cases be calculated from the rate and known frame
6148  * composition. When possible, the time should include any failed transmission
6149  * attempts.
6150  *
6151  * The driver can either call this function synchronously for every packet or
6152  * aggregate, or asynchronously as airtime usage information becomes available.
6153  * TX and RX airtime can be reported together, or separately by setting one of
6154  * them to 0.
6155  *
6156  * @pubsta: the station
6157  * @tid: the TID to register airtime for
6158  * @tx_airtime: airtime used during TX (in usec)
6159  * @rx_airtime: airtime used during RX (in usec)
6160  */
6161 void ieee80211_sta_register_airtime(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
6162 				    u32 tx_airtime, u32 rx_airtime);
6163 
6164 /**
6165  * ieee80211_txq_airtime_check - check if a txq can send frame to device
6166  *
6167  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6168  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6169  *
6170  * Return true if the AQL's airtime limit has not been reached and the txq can
6171  * continue to send more packets to the device. Otherwise return false.
6172  */
6173 bool
6174 ieee80211_txq_airtime_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6175 
6176 /**
6177  * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
6178  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6179  * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
6180  * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
6181  * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
6182  *
6183  * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
6184  * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
6185  * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
6186  * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
6187  * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
6188  * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
6189  *
6190  * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
6191  * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
6192  * set_key callback.
6193  */
6194 void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6195 			 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6196 			 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6197 				      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6198 				      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6199 				      struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
6200 				      void *data),
6201 			 void *iter_data);
6202 
6203 /**
6204  * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device
6205  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6206  * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
6207  * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
6208  * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
6209  *
6210  * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
6211  * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
6212  * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station
6213  * in removal process will be skipped.
6214  *
6215  * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section,
6216  * and thus iter must be atomic.
6217  */
6218 void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6219 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6220 			     void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6221 					  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6222 					  struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6223 					  struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
6224 					  void *data),
6225 			     void *iter_data);
6226 
6227 /**
6228  * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
6229  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
6230  * @iter: iterator function
6231  * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
6232  *
6233  * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
6234  * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
6235  * places while calling into the driver.
6236  *
6237  * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
6238  * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
6239  * removed.
6240  *
6241  * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
6242  * before the restart are considered already present so will be
6243  * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
6244  * or not.
6245  */
6246 void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
6247 	struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6248 	void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6249 		     struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
6250 		     void *data),
6251 	void *iter_data);
6252 
6253 /**
6254  * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
6255  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
6256  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6257  *
6258  * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
6259  * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
6260  * information. This function must only be called from within the
6261  * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
6262  * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
6263  * %NULL.
6264  *
6265  * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
6266  */
6267 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6268 					  struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6269 
6270 /**
6271  * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
6272  *
6273  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6274  *
6275  * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
6276  * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
6277  * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
6278  */
6279 void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6280 
6281 /**
6282  * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
6283  *
6284  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6285  *
6286  * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
6287  * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
6288  * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
6289  * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
6290  * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
6291  *
6292  * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
6293  * without connection recovery attempts.
6294  */
6295 void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6296 
6297 /**
6298  * ieee80211_disconnect - request disconnection
6299  *
6300  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6301  * @reconnect: immediate reconnect is desired
6302  *
6303  * Request disconnection from the current network and, if enabled, send a
6304  * hint to the higher layers that immediate reconnect is desired.
6305  */
6306 void ieee80211_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool reconnect);
6307 
6308 /**
6309  * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
6310  *
6311  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6312  *
6313  * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
6314  * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
6315  * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
6316  * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
6317  * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
6318  *
6319  * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
6320  * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
6321  * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
6322  * disconnect normally later.
6323  *
6324  * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
6325  * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
6326  * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
6327  * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
6328  */
6329 void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6330 
6331 /**
6332  * ieee80211_hw_restart_disconnect - disconnect from AP after
6333  * hardware restart
6334  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6335  *
6336  * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after
6337  * hardware restart.
6338  */
6339 void ieee80211_hw_restart_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6340 
6341 /**
6342  * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
6343  *	rssi threshold triggered
6344  *
6345  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6346  * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
6347  * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available
6348  * @gfp: context flags
6349  *
6350  * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
6351  * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
6352  * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
6353  */
6354 void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6355 			       enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
6356 			       s32 rssi_level,
6357 			       gfp_t gfp);
6358 
6359 /**
6360  * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
6361  *
6362  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6363  * @gfp: context flags
6364  */
6365 void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
6366 
6367 /**
6368  * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
6369  *
6370  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6371  */
6372 void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6373 
6374 /**
6375  * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
6376  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6377  * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
6378  *
6379  * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
6380  * and wake up the suspended queues.
6381  */
6382 void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
6383 
6384 /**
6385  * ieee80211_channel_switch_disconnect - disconnect due to channel switch error
6386  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6387  * @block_tx: if %true, do not send deauth frame.
6388  *
6389  * Instruct mac80211 to disconnect due to a channel switch error. The channel
6390  * switch can request to block the tx and so, we need to make sure we do not send
6391  * a deauth frame in this case.
6392  */
6393 void ieee80211_channel_switch_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6394 					 bool block_tx);
6395 
6396 /**
6397  * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
6398  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6399  * @link_id: link ID for MLO, or 0
6400  * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
6401  *
6402  * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
6403  * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
6404  * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
6405  */
6406 void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, unsigned int link_id,
6407 			    enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
6408 
6409 /**
6410  * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
6411  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6412  */
6413 void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6414 
6415 /**
6416  * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
6417  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6418  */
6419 void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6420 
6421 /**
6422  * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
6423  *
6424  * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
6425  * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
6426  * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
6427  * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
6428  * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
6429  * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
6430  *
6431  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6432  * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
6433  * @addr: & to bssid mac address
6434  */
6435 void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
6436 				  const u8 *addr);
6437 
6438 /**
6439  * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered
6440  * @pubsta: station struct
6441  * @tid: the session's TID
6442  * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are
6443  *	assumed to be out of the window after the call
6444  * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc.
6445  * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware
6446  *
6447  * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and
6448  * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it
6449  * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released
6450  * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.)
6451  */
6452 void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
6453 					  u16 ssn, u64 filtered,
6454 					  u16 received_mpdus);
6455 
6456 /**
6457  * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
6458  *
6459  * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
6460  * buffer.
6461  *
6462  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6463  * @ra: the peer's destination address
6464  * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
6465  * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
6466  */
6467 void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
6468 
6469 /**
6470  * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work
6471  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6472  * @addr: station mac address
6473  * @tid: the rx tid
6474  */
6475 void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr,
6476 				 unsigned int tid);
6477 
6478 /**
6479  * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
6480  *
6481  * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
6482  * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
6483  * reordering.
6484  *
6485  * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
6486  * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
6487  *
6488  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6489  * @addr: station mac address
6490  * @tid: the rx tid
6491  */
ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif * vif,const u8 * addr,u16 tid)6492 static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6493 						      const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
6494 {
6495 	if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
6496 		return;
6497 	ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid);
6498 }
6499 
6500 /**
6501  * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
6502  *
6503  * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
6504  * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
6505  * reordering.
6506  *
6507  * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
6508  * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
6509  *
6510  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6511  * @addr: station mac address
6512  * @tid: the rx tid
6513  */
ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif * vif,const u8 * addr,u16 tid)6514 static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6515 						     const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
6516 {
6517 	if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
6518 		return;
6519 	ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS);
6520 }
6521 
6522 /**
6523  * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout
6524  *
6525  * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx
6526  * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer.
6527  *
6528  * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa.
6529  *
6530  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6531  * @addr: station mac address
6532  * @tid: the rx tid
6533  */
6534 void ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6535 				   const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid);
6536 
6537 /* Rate control API */
6538 
6539 /**
6540  * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
6541  *
6542  * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
6543  * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
6544  * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
6545  * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
6546  *	to be filled in
6547  * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
6548  *	which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
6549  *	used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
6550  * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
6551  *	RTS threshold
6552  * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
6553  *	if the selected rate supports it
6554  * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
6555  * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
6556  * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
6557  */
6558 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
6559 	struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
6560 	struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
6561 	struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
6562 	struct sk_buff *skb;
6563 	struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
6564 	bool rts, short_preamble;
6565 	u32 rate_idx_mask;
6566 	u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
6567 	bool bss;
6568 };
6569 
6570 /**
6571  * enum rate_control_capabilities - rate control capabilities
6572  */
6573 enum rate_control_capabilities {
6574 	/**
6575 	 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW:
6576 	 * Support for extended NSS BW support (dot11VHTExtendedNSSCapable)
6577 	 * Note that this is only looked at if the minimum number of chains
6578 	 * that the AP uses is < the number of TX chains the hardware has,
6579 	 * otherwise the NSS difference doesn't bother us.
6580 	 */
6581 	RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW = BIT(0),
6582 	/**
6583 	 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_AMPDU_TRIGGER:
6584 	 * mac80211 should start A-MPDU sessions on tx
6585 	 */
6586 	RATE_CTRL_CAPA_AMPDU_TRIGGER = BIT(1),
6587 };
6588 
6589 struct rate_control_ops {
6590 	unsigned long capa;
6591 	const char *name;
6592 	void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6593 	void (*add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, void *priv,
6594 			    struct dentry *debugfsdir);
6595 	void (*free)(void *priv);
6596 
6597 	void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
6598 	void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6599 			  struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
6600 			  struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
6601 	void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6602 			    struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
6603 			    struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6604 			    u32 changed);
6605 	void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6606 			 void *priv_sta);
6607 
6608 	void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv,
6609 			      struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6610 			      void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st);
6611 	void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6612 			  struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6613 			  struct sk_buff *skb);
6614 	void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6615 			 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
6616 
6617 	void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
6618 				struct dentry *dir);
6619 
6620 	u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
6621 };
6622 
rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta * sta,enum nl80211_band band,int index)6623 static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6624 				 enum nl80211_band band,
6625 				 int index)
6626 {
6627 	return (sta == NULL || sta->deflink.supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
6628 }
6629 
6630 static inline s8
rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band * sband,struct ieee80211_sta * sta)6631 rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6632 		  struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
6633 {
6634 	int i;
6635 
6636 	for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
6637 		if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
6638 			return i;
6639 
6640 	/* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
6641 	WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
6642 
6643 	/* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
6644 	return 0;
6645 }
6646 
6647 static inline
rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band * sband,struct ieee80211_sta * sta)6648 bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6649 			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
6650 {
6651 	unsigned int i;
6652 
6653 	for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
6654 		if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
6655 			return true;
6656 	return false;
6657 }
6658 
6659 /**
6660  * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
6661  *
6662  * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
6663  * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
6664  * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
6665  * the most recent rate control module decision.
6666  *
6667  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6668  * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
6669  * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
6670  */
6671 int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6672 			   struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
6673 			   struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
6674 
6675 int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6676 void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6677 
6678 static inline bool
conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6679 conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6680 {
6681 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
6682 }
6683 
6684 static inline bool
conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6685 conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6686 {
6687 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6688 	       conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6689 }
6690 
6691 static inline bool
conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6692 conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6693 {
6694 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6695 	       conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6696 }
6697 
6698 static inline bool
conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6699 conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6700 {
6701 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
6702 }
6703 
6704 static inline bool
conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6705 conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6706 {
6707 	return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
6708 		(conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
6709 		(conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
6710 }
6711 
6712 static inline enum nl80211_iftype
ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type,bool p2p)6713 ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
6714 {
6715 	if (p2p) {
6716 		switch (type) {
6717 		case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
6718 			return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
6719 		case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
6720 			return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
6721 		default:
6722 			break;
6723 		}
6724 	}
6725 	return type;
6726 }
6727 
6728 static inline enum nl80211_iftype
ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif * vif)6729 ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
6730 {
6731 	return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
6732 }
6733 
6734 /**
6735  * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data
6736  *
6737  * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6738  * @link_id: the link ID for MLO, otherwise 0
6739  * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
6740  * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
6741  *
6742  * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and
6743  * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the
6744  * matching GroupId management frame.
6745  * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path.
6746  */
6747 void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, unsigned int link_id,
6748 				const u8 *membership, const u8 *position);
6749 
6750 void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6751 				   int rssi_min_thold,
6752 				   int rssi_max_thold);
6753 
6754 void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6755 
6756 /**
6757  * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
6758  *
6759  * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6760  *
6761  * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
6762  *
6763  * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
6764  * applicable.
6765  */
6766 int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6767 
6768 /**
6769  * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
6770  * @vif: virtual interface
6771  * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
6772  * @gfp: allocation flags
6773  *
6774  * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
6775  */
6776 void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6777 				    struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
6778 				    gfp_t gfp);
6779 
6780 /**
6781  * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
6782  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6783  * @vif: virtual interface
6784  * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
6785  * @band: the band to transmit on
6786  * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
6787  *
6788  * Note: must be called under RCU lock
6789  */
6790 bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6791 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
6792 			      int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
6793 
6794 /**
6795  * ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap - Sanity-check and parse the radiotap header
6796  *				 of injected frames.
6797  *
6798  * To accurately parse and take into account rate and retransmission fields,
6799  * you must initialize the chandef field in the ieee80211_tx_info structure
6800  * of the skb before calling this function.
6801  *
6802  * @skb: packet injected by userspace
6803  * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
6804  */
6805 bool ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap(struct sk_buff *skb,
6806 				 struct net_device *dev);
6807 
6808 /**
6809  * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
6810  *
6811  * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
6812  * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
6813  *
6814  * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
6815  *
6816  * private:
6817  *
6818  * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
6819  * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
6820  */
6821 struct ieee80211_noa_data {
6822 	u32 next_tsf;
6823 	bool has_next_tsf;
6824 
6825 	u8 absent;
6826 
6827 	u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6828 	struct {
6829 		u32 start;
6830 		u32 duration;
6831 		u32 interval;
6832 	} desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6833 };
6834 
6835 /**
6836  * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
6837  *
6838  * @attr: P2P NoA IE
6839  * @data: NoA tracking data
6840  * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6841  *
6842  * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
6843  */
6844 int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
6845 			    struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6846 
6847 /**
6848  * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
6849  *
6850  * @data: NoA tracking data
6851  * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6852  */
6853 void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6854 
6855 /**
6856  * ieee80211_tdls_oper_request - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
6857  * @vif: virtual interface
6858  * @peer: the peer's destination address
6859  * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
6860  * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
6861  * @gfp: allocation flags
6862  *
6863  * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
6864  */
6865 void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
6866 				 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
6867 				 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
6868 
6869 /**
6870  * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
6871  *
6872  * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
6873  * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
6874  * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
6875  * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
6876  * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
6877  * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
6878  *
6879  * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
6880  * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
6881  * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6882  *
6883  * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
6884  * @tid: the TID to reserve
6885  *
6886  * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
6887  */
6888 int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6889 
6890 /**
6891  * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
6892  *
6893  * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
6894  * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
6895  * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
6896  *
6897  * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
6898  * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
6899  * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6900  *
6901  * @sta: the station
6902  * @tid: the TID to unreserve
6903  */
6904 void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6905 
6906 /**
6907  * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6908  *
6909  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6910  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
6911  *	ieee80211_next_txq()
6912  *
6913  * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
6914  *
6915  * Note that this must be called in an rcu_read_lock() critical section,
6916  * which can only be released after the SKB was handled. Some pointers in
6917  * skb->cb, e.g. the key pointer, are protected by RCU and thus the
6918  * critical section must persist not just for the duration of this call
6919  * but for the duration of the frame handling.
6920  * However, also note that while in the wake_tx_queue() method,
6921  * rcu_read_lock() is already held.
6922  *
6923  * softirqs must also be disabled when this function is called.
6924  * In process context, use ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni() instead.
6925  */
6926 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6927 				     struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6928 
6929 /**
6930  * ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6931  * (in process context)
6932  *
6933  * Like ieee80211_tx_dequeue() but can be called in process context
6934  * (internally disables bottom halves).
6935  *
6936  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6937  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
6938  *	ieee80211_next_txq()
6939  */
ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct ieee80211_txq * txq)6940 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6941 						      struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
6942 {
6943 	struct sk_buff *skb;
6944 
6945 	local_bh_disable();
6946 	skb = ieee80211_tx_dequeue(hw, txq);
6947 	local_bh_enable();
6948 
6949 	return skb;
6950 }
6951 
6952 /**
6953  * ieee80211_next_txq - get next tx queue to pull packets from
6954  *
6955  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6956  * @ac: AC number to return packets from.
6957  *
6958  * Returns the next txq if successful, %NULL if no queue is eligible. If a txq
6959  * is returned, it should be returned with ieee80211_return_txq() after the
6960  * driver has finished scheduling it.
6961  */
6962 struct ieee80211_txq *ieee80211_next_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6963 
6964 /**
6965  * ieee80211_txq_schedule_start - start new scheduling round for TXQs
6966  *
6967  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6968  * @ac: AC number to acquire locks for
6969  *
6970  * Should be called before ieee80211_next_txq() or ieee80211_return_txq().
6971  * The driver must not call multiple TXQ scheduling rounds concurrently.
6972  */
6973 void ieee80211_txq_schedule_start(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6974 
6975 /* (deprecated) */
ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,u8 ac)6976 static inline void ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac)
6977 {
6978 }
6979 
6980 void __ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6981 			      struct ieee80211_txq *txq, bool force);
6982 
6983 /**
6984  * ieee80211_schedule_txq - schedule a TXQ for transmission
6985  *
6986  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6987  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6988  *
6989  * Schedules a TXQ for transmission if it is not already scheduled,
6990  * even if mac80211 does not have any packets buffered.
6991  *
6992  * The driver may call this function if it has buffered packets for
6993  * this TXQ internally.
6994  */
6995 static inline void
ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct ieee80211_txq * txq)6996 ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
6997 {
6998 	__ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, true);
6999 }
7000 
7001 /**
7002  * ieee80211_return_txq - return a TXQ previously acquired by ieee80211_next_txq()
7003  *
7004  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
7005  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
7006  * @force: schedule txq even if mac80211 does not have any buffered packets.
7007  *
7008  * The driver may set force=true if it has buffered packets for this TXQ
7009  * internally.
7010  */
7011 static inline void
ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct ieee80211_txq * txq,bool force)7012 ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
7013 		     bool force)
7014 {
7015 	__ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, force);
7016 }
7017 
7018 /**
7019  * ieee80211_txq_may_transmit - check whether TXQ is allowed to transmit
7020  *
7021  * This function is used to check whether given txq is allowed to transmit by
7022  * the airtime scheduler, and can be used by drivers to access the airtime
7023  * fairness accounting without going using the scheduling order enfored by
7024  * next_txq().
7025  *
7026  * Returns %true if the airtime scheduler thinks the TXQ should be allowed to
7027  * transmit, and %false if it should be throttled. This function can also have
7028  * the side effect of rotating the TXQ in the scheduler rotation, which will
7029  * eventually bring the deficit to positive and allow the station to transmit
7030  * again.
7031  *
7032  * The API ieee80211_txq_may_transmit() also ensures that TXQ list will be
7033  * aligned against driver's own round-robin scheduler list. i.e it rotates
7034  * the TXQ list till it makes the requested node becomes the first entry
7035  * in TXQ list. Thus both the TXQ list and driver's list are in sync. If this
7036  * function returns %true, the driver is expected to schedule packets
7037  * for transmission, and then return the TXQ through ieee80211_return_txq().
7038  *
7039  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
7040  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
7041  */
7042 bool ieee80211_txq_may_transmit(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
7043 				struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
7044 
7045 /**
7046  * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq
7047  *
7048  * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e.
7049  * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up
7050  * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa.
7051  *
7052  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
7053  * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count
7054  * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count
7055  */
7056 void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
7057 			     unsigned long *frame_cnt,
7058 			     unsigned long *byte_cnt);
7059 
7060 /**
7061  * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination.
7062  *
7063  * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination.
7064  * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
7065  *
7066  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
7067  * @inst_id: the local instance id
7068  * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*)
7069  * @gfp: allocation flags
7070  */
7071 void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
7072 				   u8 inst_id,
7073 				   enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason,
7074 				   gfp_t gfp);
7075 
7076 /**
7077  * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event.
7078  *
7079  * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The
7080  * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211.
7081  * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
7082  *
7083  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
7084  * @match: match event information
7085  * @gfp: allocation flags
7086  */
7087 void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
7088 			      struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match,
7089 			      gfp_t gfp);
7090 
7091 /**
7092  * ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for RX.
7093  *
7094  * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the
7095  * rate information in the RX status struct and the frame length.
7096  *
7097  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
7098  * @status: &struct ieee80211_rx_status containing the transmission rate
7099  *          information.
7100  * @len: frame length in bytes
7101  */
7102 u32 ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
7103 			      struct ieee80211_rx_status *status,
7104 			      int len);
7105 
7106 /**
7107  * ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for TX.
7108  *
7109  * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the
7110  * rate information in the TX info struct and the frame length.
7111  *
7112  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
7113  * @info: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
7114  * @len: frame length in bytes
7115  */
7116 u32 ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
7117 			      struct ieee80211_tx_info *info,
7118 			      int len);
7119 /**
7120  * ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap - enable hardware encapsulation offloading.
7121  *
7122  * This function is used to notify mac80211 that a vif can be passed raw 802.3
7123  * frames. The driver needs to then handle the 802.11 encapsulation inside the
7124  * hardware or firmware.
7125  *
7126  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
7127  * @enable: indicate if the feature should be turned on or off
7128  */
7129 bool ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool enable);
7130 
7131 /**
7132  * ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl - Get FILS discovery template.
7133  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
7134  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
7135  *
7136  * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
7137  *
7138  * Return: FILS discovery template. %NULL on error.
7139  */
7140 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
7141 						  struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
7142 
7143 /**
7144  * ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl - Get unsolicited broadcast
7145  *	probe response template.
7146  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
7147  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
7148  *
7149  * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
7150  *
7151  * Return: Unsolicited broadcast probe response template. %NULL on error.
7152  */
7153 struct sk_buff *
7154 ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
7155 					  struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
7156 
7157 /**
7158  * ieeee80211_obss_color_collision_notify - notify userland about a BSS color
7159  * collision.
7160  *
7161  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
7162  * @color_bitmap: a 64 bit bitmap representing the colors that the local BSS is
7163  *	aware of.
7164  * @gfp: allocation flags
7165  */
7166 void
7167 ieeee80211_obss_color_collision_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
7168 				       u64 color_bitmap, gfp_t gfp);
7169 
7170 /**
7171  * ieee80211_is_tx_data - check if frame is a data frame
7172  *
7173  * The function is used to check if a frame is a data frame. Frames with
7174  * hardware encapsulation enabled are data frames.
7175  *
7176  * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
7177  */
ieee80211_is_tx_data(struct sk_buff * skb)7178 static inline bool ieee80211_is_tx_data(struct sk_buff *skb)
7179 {
7180 	struct ieee80211_tx_info *info = IEEE80211_SKB_CB(skb);
7181 	struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (void *) skb->data;
7182 
7183 	return info->flags & IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP ||
7184 	       ieee80211_is_data(hdr->frame_control);
7185 }
7186 
7187 /**
7188  * ieee80211_set_active_links - set active links in client mode
7189  * @vif: interface to set active links on
7190  * @active_links: the new active links bitmap
7191  *
7192  * This changes the active links on an interface. The interface
7193  * must be in client mode (in AP mode, all links are always active),
7194  * and @active_links must be a subset of the vif's valid_links.
7195  *
7196  * If a link is switched off and another is switched on at the same
7197  * time (e.g. active_links going from 0x1 to 0x10) then you will get
7198  * a sequence of calls like
7199  *  - change_vif_links(0x11)
7200  *  - unassign_vif_chanctx(link_id=0)
7201  *  - change_sta_links(0x11) for each affected STA (the AP)
7202  *    (TDLS connections on now inactive links should be torn down)
7203  *  - remove group keys on the old link (link_id 0)
7204  *  - add new group keys (GTK/IGTK/BIGTK) on the new link (link_id 4)
7205  *  - change_sta_links(0x10) for each affected STA (the AP)
7206  *  - assign_vif_chanctx(link_id=4)
7207  *  - change_vif_links(0x10)
7208  *
7209  * Note: This function acquires some mac80211 locks and must not
7210  *	 be called with any driver locks held that could cause a
7211  *	 lock dependency inversion. Best call it without locks.
7212  */
7213 int ieee80211_set_active_links(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 active_links);
7214 
7215 /**
7216  * ieee80211_set_active_links_async - asynchronously set active links
7217  * @vif: interface to set active links on
7218  * @active_links: the new active links bitmap
7219  *
7220  * See ieee80211_set_active_links() for more information, the only
7221  * difference here is that the link change is triggered async and
7222  * can be called in any context, but the link switch will only be
7223  * completed after it returns.
7224  */
7225 void ieee80211_set_active_links_async(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
7226 				      u16 active_links);
7227 
7228 #endif /* MAC80211_H */
7229